Minolta XG-E Guide

Service Manual
E ft ft 6 4 E £ E $ E E EC $ D D CDC CACA
A te te A A A A O A A A A O O A вы
O OS OS OS OÙ ES O &# 6 ££ ad à à eo
2006-500, -800
Shutter Parts List
for XG serles
a
ММОНА
MINOLTA XG7 2006-100(2006-200)
MINOLTA XG2 2006-300(2006-400)
MINOLTA XG-E 2006-500(2006-600)
( ) Black body
TYPE
Electronic Auto Exposure Control 35mm Focal Plane
Shutter Single Lens Reflex Camera.
STANDARD LENS
MD ROKKOR 50mm F 1.4 (2521)
MD ROKKOR 50mm F 1.7 (2520)
MD ROKKOR 50mm F 2 (524)---for export
AE SYSTEM
Aperture priority system
SHUTTER
Electronic control lateral focal plane shutter
Shutter speed : Auto 1/1000~1 sec. (Stepless)
Manual 1/1000, 1/500, 1/250, 1/125,
1/60, 1/30, 1/15, 1/8, 1/4,
1/2, | sec. and В.
: Magnetic release (with release
lock to suspend operation when
battery voltage is too low or
shutter speed exceeds 1/1000).
Dial : Click-stop rotary dial with A-
position lock and +2 EV exposure
correction scale in Auto.
: About 10sec. operation. Started
by shutter button with set-dial at
SELF-TIMER. Electronic control.
Operation is indicated by LED
blinking at front of camera.
Blinking cycle is faster after 7.5
Release
Self-timer
sec.
X contact (electro flash is tuned
to longer sec. time than 1/60 sec.).
MF, M and FP are tuned to longer
sec. than 1/15 sec.
Synchro terminal: Hot shoe and JIS-B type socket
(Electric shock proof)
synchro auto control: With exclusive strobo (8668)
mounted and charge completed, when
Synchro contact :
shutter is automatically operated,
exposure is at X-tuned speed (1/60)
and then LED blinks in finder.
FILM
Winding
FEED
: Operation lever type. Winding
angle 130°, reserve angle 30°.
: Possible with exclusive auto winder
(8731-200) mounted (at bottom of
camera).
: 4 claws to wind film reversely.
Auto winding
Spool
Film counter
Film signal
Re-winding
: Auto reset type calculator.
: Built-in
: Re-winding button is automatically
reset as a result of winding.
: Hinged, one-touch locking, removable
type.
Unlocked by rewinding knob oper-
Back cover
FINDER
: Eye level type (Pentagon prism)
: Split image and micro prism for
center, mat for periphery.
Type
Focal plate
View rate : 93% (to 24% 36mm standard image)
Magnification : 0.9 (at © with 50mm standard
lens)
Visibility : —1 diopter
Indication in finder: Exposure indication by LED
(two-print indication represents
“intermediate ); shutter speed
scale.
High-speed non-interlocking LED
(shutter doesn't operate when №
LED is on). |
Exclusive strobo complete charge
and X auto setting are indicated
by. LED blinking.
: Quick return system.
PO value: 123 (to standard picture)
EXPOSURE CONTROL
Full-aperture TTL metering, central-
zone weighted (overall) metering type.
Mirror
Metering system :
Light receiving element:
CdS (on both sides of eye-piece)
Auto exposure range:
EV 2—17 (ASA 100, F 1.4 lens)
ASA sens. interlock range:
ASA 25-1600 (shutter dial pull-up).
Exposure correction:
Stepless up to 12 EV to standard
value (with lock at standard
position, clicking every 1/2 step).
Exposure meter switch:
Touch switch type (ON when shutter
button is touched).
When touched with gloved hand, it
is ON at the lst step of shutter
button (about 0.5mm stroke).
2 silver oxide hattervs
(equivalent to JIS-G13)
S-76 (SONY EVEREADY)
G-13 (NATIONAL, HITACHI,
TOSHIBA)
S-76 (EVEREADY)
MS-76 (MALLORY) | U: S: A. Europe
RS-76 (RAY-O-VAC)-U. S.A,
Power source
Japan
Power supply switch:
ON with shutter button depressed
(changeover switch provided
separately).
(ON: Ready for operation, OFF:
Metering circuit OFF, no shutter
. operation)
Battery check : Set changeover switch to B.C. and
check by LED at front of camera.
lt is reset when released.
OTHERS
* Film signal attached
* Memo holder attached
EXCLUSIVE ACCESSORIES
* Auto winder G
* Auto electroflash 200X
* Remoto cord 5 50cm (20-in)
* Remoto cord L 5m (16-ft.)
DIMENSIONS
Size (body only) : 138(L) x 88(H) X 52(W) mm
5-5/8(L) x 3-7/16 CH) X 2(W) in.
Weight : 5058 (excl. battery)
17-13/16 oz.
Description of Mechanism
Winding Mechanism...
Winding Lever Operation -..eoomcccocccncnconononanccnnaconcancconanccnnanccanacenorcnranaseso
Shutter Dial Mechanism...
A. Auto/Manual/Bulb changeover -------
В. Film sensitivity setting ----------
С. Exposure correction...
D. Release switch -.......................
Magnetic Release Mechanism ...
|
Sth cee
SPS CCCP SCT SCEPC ECT Pees étre sen
Stet LES CREER IE TITLE CERA ea ús
AAA TREE
ee RMS RSS ENST ST Sn RS TR TS ty? tt? teeter ee er ss 4
ооо ee eo um ГУ = = = ohne * ae
Shutter Mechanism sn... A rr AAA
A. Charge mechanism
:
В. Malte AAC ara 9
С. X contact mechanism ......-.........-.
D. Mirror preset reset mechanism -------.
Mirror Box Mechanism ....--..----
RL RL eee ee eee eee eee eee ee eee ee |
A. Mirror (45°) retaining mechanism ---. er а ee re ee 12
B. Mirror raising and lowering mechanism :-............. sisi .. 13
С. Preset mechanism.......................onenmensennnnnscusesccsenmensessersessese 14
Principle of Metering and Description of Circuit „еее
А. Outline ess eee ник аи в заза сала nn nenne nm nun nn en naar nn“ 15
В. General description een 15
С. Description of circuit ---.+sccccrsesssccssceesesscecesevccecsseseessessevanssscuacssssnsessesunes 19
1. Mode selector circwit ss 000000 Rn ини виза тии иии ие nun nenn ина инт ню ииинивн 19
Metering operation circuit
D) 0 чп UT A ti A
Control circuit -
si eee cl
Strobo Auto
=
an
. Winder control function
. Metering switch (Touch switch)
Voltage detecting СС тора ча rra bierno 19
Indication circuit +: иена ина
Magnetic FOME ici daa 21
Over- range lock PRE
. Memory circuit еек рае nennen
Logarithmic expansion circuit ---..................
. Power source holding circuit
SURE Made: sen i naa a oa Sena Pee 23
. Mepretie sell...
Remote control --................
ER
17. XG Time Chartres ronca
D. Circuit diagram and Switch characteristics +...» ««eoooooocororescornarrcnrcararaos 26
Page
12
15
1. Winding Mechanism
(Operating Order)
(Arrows show interlocking marks)
- Manual winding
æ———— Winder
| Winding lever (0375) | | | Winder |
Y
| Winding lever axis (3006) | | | Winder coupler (3024) |
Winding operation
lever-B (3014)
|
Winding operation >
Winding axis (3015)
T
1
|
|
|
|
|
|
!
I
|
|
|
J
plate (3038) L--______
‘a Winding claw (3039) | | Change operation plate (0360) Le.
I y y y +
_______] Winding gear (3032) | | Charge lever (3010) | Shutter charge
Г gear-D (3008)
| | у | i | { +
[Counter operation gear-A (3412)| Windimg idle gear (3033) | | Mirror box (0501) | Shutter charge
Li
i gear-C (3016)
a.
7 bl
[Counter operation gear-C (3411) | Sprocket idle gear (3034) [F мм 7 | Shutter |
$ e
[Counter operation gear-B (3410)} | Sprocket gear (3055) | | Spool idle gear (3035) |
T T T
j { y t +
| Counter ratchet (3403) | | Sprocket shaft (3052) | | Spool gear (3050) |
1 1
EN 1 |
| Counter dial (3405) | a Sprocket (3051) | | Spool claw (3043) |
I
y
| Spool (0320) |
(Parts which require positioning)
Winding gear (3032) — — Winding idle gear (3033)
Sprocket gear (3055) — — Sprocket idle gear (3034)
Counter operation gear-B (3410) — — Counter ratchet (3403)
Shutter charge gear-C (3016) — — Shutter
_ * Winding operation plate (3038) is stopped by winding operation lever-A (3415) during winding,
and then winding shaft (3015) does not return.
* Winding lever (0375) can be stored even during winding.
« Sprocket (3051) is turned 1-1/3 times and the spool once when winding lever is operated once.
* With the winding lever pulled out up to the allowance angle when winder is used, continuous
winding is impossible unless the winding lever is released.
Counter dial (3405)
Counter ratchet (3403)
Winding lever (0375)
Counter operation gear-C (3411)
Winding lever axis (3006)
Winding operation lever-B (3014)
Winding operation lever-A (3415)
Winding operation plate (3038)
Winding claw (3039)
Winding idle gear (3033)—
Winding axis (3015)
Counter operation gear-A (3412)
Sprocket idle gear (3034)
Winding gear (3032)
ey
Spool gear (3050)
Sprocket gear (3055
Spool idle gear (3035)
Spool claw (3043)
Sprocket (3051)
Sprocket shaft (3052)
Spool (0320)
Shutter charge gear-D (3008)
Charge operation plate (0360)
Mirror box
Charge lever (3010)
Winder coupler (3024)
Winding operation lever-A position (158"40")
2. Winding Lever Operation
Reversing stop claw action start (158*20”)
Over-charge
Shutter system charge 160
q > complete (156° 20°)
- 4
a” ñ
\
6
=.
=
=
ыы
%
\
4
ez
.
a,
==“
Mirror return system charge start (49"30")
Mirror drive sy charge start (57°30°)
Shutter system charge start (5755)
Shutter side synchro ON-OFF (66°38")
Winding shaft start (30°) Body side synchro OF F--ON (85°06’)
Winding gear start (40°)
/
Winding stop lever Ist step (40°)
Winding claw engagement (37°40')
Winding operation lever-A position (36°)
Winding stop lever 2 nd step (S, OFF—ON) (35°)
3. Shutter Dial Mechanism
(General)
The shutter speed dial of XG is provided with Auto/Manual changeover, film sens. setting,
exposure correction and release switch mechanisms.
(Operation)
l. Shutter speed dial (0290) is usually engaged with dial shaft (0272), ASA brush holder
(0273), and ASA dial plate (2005) respectively at aa’, bb’ and cc’. The dial then rotates
along with each of the parts.
2. Further, dial shaft (0272) is engaged with shutter speed dial plate (0295) and cam plate
(2009) respectively at dd’ and ee”, and then rotates along with shutter dial (0290).
3. With shutter speed dial (0290) lifted up, it is only disengaged from dial shaft (0272) at
aa ‚and ASA brush holder (0273) and ASA dial plate (2005) rotate along with the
shutter speed dial, but dial shaft (0272), shutter speed dial plate (0295) and cam plate
(2009) do not rotate.
A. Auto/Manual/Bulb changeover
1. When shutter speed dial (0290) is set to Auto “A”, cam plate (2009) being engaged
with dial shaft (0272) at ee” rotates, then AM change lever (2010) operates at cam
face (D in the direction of the arrow and AM change switch (58. $ 10) of AM change
holder is shifted to AUTO side of circuit board A (4201), simultaneously @ of dial
shaft (0272) is locked by @’ of auto lock plate (2016).
Shutter release
button pressure (2020)
Shutter release
button set (0281)
Shutter speed dial (0295)
ASA dial (2005)
dial /Function
selector (0290)
Siutrar пра |
u
р 9
ASA brush
holder (0273)
Auto lock plate (2016)
A. M change holder
(0271)
Circuit base
plate-A (4201)
Release switch-C
(4005)
A. M change lever (2010)
А. M change spring
(2012)
. When auto lock plate (2016) is released from dial shaft (0272) by pressing auto lock
button (2018) in the direction of the arrow, thus setting shutter speed dial (0290) to
an optional position, cam face if) of cam plate (2009) being engaged with dial shaft
(0272) is also moved. and AM change lever (2010) is operated by the function of AM
change spring (2012) in the opposite direction to the arrow and AM change switch (58
S 10) is then shifted to the manual side of circuit board (4201).
. When shutter speed dial (0290) is set to “В” position, В switch contact (4237) is
pushed by projection h of cam plate (2009) in the direction of the arrow, and then
valve switch (S5) including release switch C (4005) is turned OFF.
B. Film sensitivity setting
№:
Film sensitivity can be set by lifting and turning shutter speed dial (0290) and setting
it to the ASA sensitivity.
. When shutter speed dial (0290) is lifted up, it is disengaged from dial shaft (0272) at
aa’. Then dial shaft (0272) is not rotated but ASA dial plate (2005) and ASA brush
holder (0273) rotated.
And the ASA brush of ASA brush holder (0273) is set to the position on the sliding
resistance of circuit board A (4201) corresponding to the sensitivity value of ASA
dial plate (0295).
C. Exposure correction
1. Dial shaft (0272) is provided every 0.5EV with click grooves up to +2.0EV from
AUTO “A” position of shutter speed dial/Function selector. Exposure correction can
be done by releasing auto lock plate (2016) and by setting “A” of shutter speed dial/
Function selector (0290) to the desired position. At that time, cam plate (2009) is
also rotated, but AM change lever (2010) is on cam face f, and AM change switch
(S 8. S 10) of AM change holder (0271) is on the AUTO side.
2. In accordance with the exposure correction setting, the ASA brush of ASA brush holder
(0271) moves on the ASA resistance of circuit board A (4201), then auto exposure and
shutter speed indications are changed corresponding to the amount of correction.
(Position for Auto)
Na M change holder (0271)
D. Release switch
1. Shutter release button set (0281) passes through the center of shutter speed dial.
Shutter button shaft (2021) comes in contact with release switch A (4003), and is
maintained by shutter button holder (2020).
2. Shutter button shaft (2020) is separated from shutter button cap (2023) by the insul-
ator of shutter button (2019), thus forming touch switch (S 11).
3. Release switch A (4003), B (4004), C (4005) and D (4006) are secured on shutter
speed dial base plate (0384). Metering switch (S 1) is formed by release switch A
(4003) and B (4004); and release switch (S 2) is formed by release switch C (4005)
and D (4006). When shutter button set (0281) is pressed, these switches are turned
ON in order, thus starting the operation of the circuit.
FER a UA
e MI eee
|< = 22
Shutter release button (2019)
= Shutter release button cap (2023)
— Shutter release button pressure (2020)
Shutter release button axis (2021)
— Shutter dial base plate
Release switch-A (4003) | Lt
Release switch-B (4004)
Release switch-C (4005)
Release switch-D (4006)
(ON) |
10
4. Magnetic Release Mechanism
(Charge)
1. Winding operation causes charge operation plate (0360) and charge lever (3010) being
engaged with the plate to be shifted in the direction of the arrow.
2. Further, mirror return lever (0524) being engaged with charge lever (3010) is moved
in the direction of arrow to push spring lever (0581) in the direction of arrow, thus
charging operation lever spring B (2039) and completing the preparations for release.
(Operation)
1. Release magnet operation plate (2030) is maintained being attracted by release magnet
(2028) via release magnet york (2026) and release magnet retainer (2027).
2. When shutter release button set (0281) is pushed, the electric circuit operates. Then
a magnetic field opposite to that of release magnet (2028) is generated at release
magnet bobbin (0583) attached to release magnet york (2026), and current instantane-
ously flows due to the discharge of condenser.
3. Consequently, release magnet operation plate (2030) becomes unbalanced in attraction,
then released by the function of operation lever spring (2039) and shifted in the direc-
tion of arrow.
4. Release operation lever A (2036), B (2037), C (0571) and mirror release bar (5021)
are operated in order via @ of release magnet operation lever (0582), then mirror
release bar (5021) pushes mirror release lever (5022) in the direction of arrow thus
release the mirror system and allowing the mirror preset system to operate.
(Return)
1.
When mirror return lever (0524) has returned to the original position with paar
completed, spring lever (0581) retained by mirror return lever (0524) becomes free.
. On returning of mirror return lever (0524), charge lever (3010) and. release operation
lever spring (2035) also return in the direction of dashed line.
. Release operation lever spring (2035) pushes release operation lever-A (2036) and
operates release magnet operation lever (0582) in the direction of arrow, then presses
release magnet operation plate (2030) against release magnet york (2026).
. Operation of release operation lever-A (2036) in the direction of dashed line causes
release operation lever-B (2037), C (0571), mirror release bar (5021) and mirror
release lever (5022) to return in the direction of dashed line, thus getting ready for
the next charge.
Magnetic Release Operation by Remote Cord
When the remote cord is connected to the release terminal as illustrated, the release
core is electrically connected to the remote control contact B, and then release switch
(S;) and remote cord switch (S;°) are connected in parallel to each other. The magne-
tic release is operated when remote cord switch (S;’) is turned ON.
The shutter speed indication can be checked by setting touch switch (Зи) or metering
switch (S,) to ON.
Release magnet (2028)
Release operation operation Ey Release magnet york
lever-B (2037) lever spring y (2026)
2095) Release magnet pressure
(2027)
Reledse magnet operation
lever (0582)
Operation lever spring
Release operation
lever-C (0571)
Spring lever (0581)
Mirror release
bar (5021)
Mirror release
lever (5022)
Charging & operating
ml direction
cts Resetting direction
Mirror return lever
plate (0360) (
Remote control contact B
un
LA
=
mA
Lom mb e e ml
т
e
La
“Release core
— Insulator
= Release terminal
=
—
5, Shutter Mechanism
(General Description)
1. The shutter of XG employs only electric control for the shutter speed control and
only “X” for the synchro mechanism, thus making its mechanism very compact.
2. The shutter curtain runs laterally and the curtain shaft employs a single shaft system.
Also, an OFF-type trigger contact is used and all parts are set up into one unit.
A. Charge mechanism
1. Winding operation causes charge gear A (2105) being engaged with shutter charge gear
C (3016) on body side to rotate in the direction of arrow.
2. As charge gear B (2104) being engaged with charge gear A (2015) rotates, first curtain
shutter gear (2106) and second curtain shutter gear (2107) rotate in the direction of
arrow.
3. First curtain gear (2135) and second curtain gear (2129) being engaged with first
curtain shutter gear (2106) and second curtain shutter gear (2107) rotate in the direc-
tion of arrow, charging the 1st and 2nd curtains.
4. Oo the other hand, control cam (2108) is rotated for charge during rotation of charge
gear A (2105) in the direction of arrow.
5. Operation of control cam (2108) in the direction of arrow causes first curtain stop
lever (0212) to be released so that the stop lever can rotate by its spring strength
in the direction of arrow to stop the first curtain shutter gear.
6. Further, control cam (2108) operates trigger contact operation lever (2173) in the
direction of arrow to turn on trigger contact (2166) and operate second curtain release
lever (0255) in the direction of arrow to press shutter magnet (2150) against shutter
magnet core (2149).
7. Operation of second curtain release lever (0255) in the direction of arrow causes
second curtain lever (2160) and second curtain stop lever (0219) to be operated in the
direction of arrow by second curtain lever spring (2163) and second curtain stop lever
spring (2123). Then second curtain stop lever (0219) is able to stop second curtain
barrel.
8. First curtain shutter gear (2106) is stopped by first curtain stop lever (0212), cont-
rol cam (2108) by control cam stop lever (2115) and second curtain barrel (2129) by
second curtain stop lever (0219). Shutter magnet core (2149) is pressed against shutter
magnet (2150) and then trigger contact (2166) is ON thus completing the charge.
9. When the winding lever has returned to the original position, charge gear A (2105) and
B (2104) also return to the pre-charge positions, thus completing the preparations for
release.
B. Release mechanism
1. When the shutter button is operated, the preset interlocking lever on the mirror box
side operates control cam stop lever (2115) in the direction of dashed line just before
the end of operation of the mirror preset svstem, thus releasing control cam (2108).
2. Control cam (2108) is rotated in the direction of dashed line by the function of spring
to operate first curtain stop lever (0212) in the direction of dashed line thus releas-
ing it from first curtain shutter gear (2106), then it is rotated in the direction of
dashed line by the function of the first curtain spring, allowing the first curtain to
start running and exposure.
3. Oo completion of counting at the electric circuit, the current to the magnet is cut off.
Shutter magnet core (2149) is released from shutter magnet, and magnet lever (0252)
is operated in the direction of dashed line by the function of spring. Then second
curtain release lever (0255), second curtain lever (2130) and second curtain stop lever
(0219) are operated in the direction of dashed line in order, allowing the second curtain
to start running to complete exposure.
\У
10
Charge om,
Release =>
Second curtain stop
lever spring (2123)
| Second curtain stop lever set
(0219)
Socond curtain release
operation lever (2160)
Second curtain release
lever set (0255)
Shutter magnet core (2149)
Shutter magnet (2150)
Trigger contact (2166)
Magnet lever
(0252)
Trigger contact operation
lever (2173)
Second curtain ——
barrel (2129)
Control cam (2108) ———
Control cam
stop lever
(2115)
}
<
E
Second curtain
Rear (2 129)
i ta a
| TL Hh “ First curtain gear (2135)
Second curtain shutter
gear (2107)
First curtain shutter
gear (2106)
First curtain stop—
lever (0212)
A
(2105) DA
Charge gear-B (2104)
C. X contact mechanism
(Charge)
1. When first curtain shutter gear (2106) is rotated in the direction of arrow, first
curtain brake lever (0258) having been pushed up at @ is operated in the direction of
arrow by spring, then X contact plate (0207) completes the preparation for operation.
2. On the other hand, operation of charge lever (3010) on body side in the direction of
arrow causes X lever (0205) having been pushed at (€' to be operated in the direction
of arrow by spring, then X contact (2188) also completes the preparation for operation.
X contact plate (0207)
X contact (2189 (©) Ne
First curtain shutter
gear (2106)
ASS
1
|
TEE he
(a) First curtain brake lever (0258)
(Operation)
1. As the first curtain runs, first curtain shutter gear (2106) rotates in the direction of
arrow and pushes first curtain brake lever (0258) at @ of first curtain shutter gear
(2106) just before the end of rotation (just before completion of 15 curtain running).
2. First curtain brake lever (0258) pushes X contact plate (0207) at & in the direction
of arrow, then X contact (2188) and X contact plate (0207) are ON.
3. When the mirror return lever on the mirror box side has returned to the original
position, body side charge lever (3010) operates in the direction of arrow to shift X
lever (0205) in the direction of arrow, then X contact (2188) is separated from X
contact plate (0207) to become OFF.
Х. contact plate
(0207)
TE 0m 07
X. contact (2188)
Firat curtain Charge lever
shutter gear (3010)
(2106)
р =
X.lever (0205)
(a "First curtain brake lever (0258)
Part No.
2006-0503-03
2006-0521-02
2006-0558-02
2006-0561-01
2006-0562-01
2006-5019-02
2006-5021-01
2006-5023-02
2006-5027-01
2006-5028-01
2006-5029-01
2006-5030-01
2006-5110-01
2006-5111-01
2006-5112-03
2006-5113-02
2006-5114-01
2006-5116-05
2006-5117-04
2006-5118-01
2006-5119-01
2006-5806-02
2006-9106-01
9611-1616-12
9612-1616-07
9721-0080-13
9721-0150-13
9794-3858-20
2006-5033-81
2006-5120-81
= ка =
Part -.Name
Mirror box set |
Mirror operation lever set
Mirror holder set
Operation lever-B base set (Right)
Operation lever-8 base set (Left)
Mirror box apron
Mirror release lever
Release lever spring
Flare shield plate (bottom)
Flare shield plate (Left side)
Flare shield plate (Right side)
Flare shield support plate
Mirror support stopper-A
Mirror stopper
Mirror cushion
Mirror support stopper-B
Mirror cushion-B
Mirror operation lever-B
Mirror operation lever spring
Mirror box light shield plate
Mirror stopper gum
Mirror
Screw-C
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
E-ring
E-ring
Washer
Mirror box sheet
Mirror arm cushion
Qty
DAS RIA 1
$ 5 —#fEV-— eu 1
T5—kKAK—+ty À 1
$ Я REV -S— BRE E > dy
| (4)
$ 5—RfEV-S—BRE + y h
(=)
9-7, 22707 1
TSF-v)—- vs— 1
TI5-v)—- zvss—- ı 7 YM
7-х (ТЯ) 1
7vyI—Bitkv~—b (EM) 1
TUTELAR 1
7VI—BikY— |b BHR
[5—-MBAhOA—A
T FMA get —
SAA
$57 — MBA h > -—B
332% uv В
$ 5 —fE Y eos —
$ я REV NAT YYZ
S7-Ke7ABAN
T7—-AbywA-—AA
$7-
FF Rik wb E AC
FERA AL
+FARHA<E HAL
EL
E Y yy
MO » Y + —
327 —KAS— MH
S9-T- AI 9 Yu
lo
12
XG 7 CODE No. 2006-100, -200
XG 2 CODE No. 2006-300, -400
XG-E CODE No. 2006-500, -600
9612-1416-07 (x2) (A)
a an | er
=
9693-2045-01
m 9695-2055-07
969 1-2045-07
M 9601-2055-07
E 0001-2045-07
|
@
|
i
i
of
|
@p 9721-0120-13
|
& | ©) 2006-0386-01
pl
5 2006-3410-02
}
eo 2006-34 1 1-04
12
D. Mirror preset reset Mechanism
1. As the second curtain runs, second curtain shutter gear (2107) rotates in the direction
of arrow and pushes second curtain brake lever (2181) at @ of second curtain shutter
gear (2107) just before the end of rotation (just before completion of 2nd curtain
running) .
2. Second curtain brake lever (2181) kicks mirror return lever lock claw (0522) on the
mirror box side to reset the mirror preset system.
Second curtain shutter gear (2107)
Mirror return lever lok claw (0522)
Second curtain brake lever (2181)
6. Mirror Box Mechanism
A. Mirror (45°) retaining mechanism
Mirror operation lever B (5116) is free before and after winding. It is pushed down by
mirror operation lever spring (5117), then mirror holder (0550) being engaged with mirror
operation lever (5116) is retained at 3 points of mirror stopper (5111), mirror support
A (5110) and В (5113), thus keeping the mirror angle at 45”.
Mirror support stopper-A (5110)
Mirror stopper (5111)
Mirror holder (0558)
Mirror support stepper-H (5113)
Mirror operation lever-B (5116)
Mirroroperation lever spring (5117)
13
B. Mirror raising and lowering mechanism
(Raising)
Operation of release magnet causes mirror release bar (5021) being engaged with
release operation lever C (0571) to operate in the direction of the arrow. Then it is
disengaged from mirror operation lever (0521) at @, and mirror-up spring (5042) moves
preset operation lever (0523) and mirror operation lever (0521) in the direction of the
arrow.
. Operation of mirror operation lever (0521) causes mirror operation lever-B (5116) to
operate in the direction of the arrow. Then mirror holder (0558) being engaged with
mirror operation lever-B (5116) is raised.
(Lowering)
1.
When the second curtain has completed running, preset operetion lever (0523) is retur-
ned in the direction opposite to the arrow, and mirror operation lever (0521) is also
returned. Then mirror operation lever-B (5116) is returned by mirror operation lever
spring (5117) along with mirror operation lever (0521), and then mirror holder (0558)
is lowered.
‚ On the other hand, the release magnet is returned on returning of preset operation
lever (0523), then release operation lever-C (0571) is operated in the direction opposite
to the arrow, and mirror release bar (5021) and mirror release lever (0503) are retur-
ned by spring, thus stopping mirror operation lever (0521).
Mirror holder (0558
Mirror operation rl
lever-B (5116)
Mirror operation
lever (0521)
Mirror operation
lever spring (5117)
Mirror release lever
(0503)
Pre-set operalion lever
(0523)
= A Mirror release bar (5021)
Release operation lever-C (0571)
14
C. Preset mechanism
(Operation)
1. Operation of the release magnet causes preset operation lever (0523) to operate in the
direction lever (0523) to operate in the direction of the arrow. Then preset lever
(0532) and preset operation plate (5048) are operated in the direction of the arrow via
preset connector (5047). Thus the mirror is raised at the same time with stopdown
operation. |
2. The rotation of preset operation plate (5048) is transmitted to flywheel (0542) via
speed increase gear (0541), thus controlling the entire system.
(Returning)
1. On completion of the second curtain running, mirror return lever lock claw (0522) is
kicked in the direction of the arrow, releasing it from mirror return lever (0524), and
then preset operation lever (0523) is returned along with mirror return lever (0524)
by the function of mirror return spring (5044), and also preset operation plate (5048)
is returned via preset connector (5047), thus the mirror is lowered.
2. As preset connector (5047) operates, preset lever (0532) is returned by preset lever
spring (5051) in the direction opposite to the arrow, then the diaphragm is released.
Pre-set lever spring Pre-set lever (0532)
(5051) р ЧИ
Mirror return spring (5044)
| я
7 > = | LE
Pre-set operation А . р (5) |
Fly wheel (0542)
lever (0523)
Increase gear (0541)
Mirror return lever
lock claw (0522)
Pre-set operation plate (5048)
Pre-set counter
(5047)
Mirror return lever (0524)
ЗО
7. Principle of Metering and Description of Circuit
A. Outline
e Function
The electric circuit of XG has various functions as follows:
1) Automatic exposure control and shutter speed indication by LED.
2) Manual exposure control.
3) Shutter sec. time auto changeover and blinking indication by exclusive strobe.
4) Bulb exposure control.
5) Touch switch.
6) Magnetic release.
7) Electronic self-timer and blinking interval variable indicator circuit.
8) Voltage detection (inel. В.С)
9) Winder control.
® Composition
The circuit of XG is complicated having a lot of functions, and therefore solid-state con-
struction is employed as much as possible for the circuit. It basically consists of two
monosyllic ICs with 20 pins each for metering, operation, control (IC 1), and for indication
(IC 2), one monosyllic IC with 10 pins mainly for self-timer (IC 3), and hybrid IC (HIC)
for the purpose of connection between magnetic release and each circuit. To cope with
such complicated wiring, a flexible circuit board is employed.
The switches are also transistorized as much as possible. Trigger switch, the representa-
tive one of mechanical switches, is of OFF type to minimize the influence of chattering.
For the brushes of sliding resistors such as ASA resistor and diaphragm resistor, the
number of brushes is increased in order to reduce noise. Also, 12 LED's are built into
the indication board as indication elements.
B. General description
® Metering system
XG is a single-lens reflex camera using TTL metering system. And the amount of light
to CdS is changed and shut off due to camera operations (such as auto exposure control
and mirror operation).
It is therefore necessary for the camera to memorize the result of TTL metering (expo-
sure time in XG) just before release.
® Memory system
XG employs such a system that both in auto and manual the exposure time is converted
into an electrical amount (voltage) and it is charged into a condenser and then the charge
voltage is memorized by the camera. Also, the system is to memorize logarithmic values
because the metering range and film sensitivity interlocking range are wide; interchange-
ability 1s required for lenses and parts, making the circuits complicated; and the range of
memorized values (exposure time) is also very wide.
® Metering switch
In order to prevent wasting of the battery due to forgetting to turn off the metering
switch, the metering switch is interlocked with the release button. A touch switch is
installed to improve the maneuverability during metering. (A touch switch uses a part
(finger) of the user's body as a switch contact. So, when the user wears gloves, the
finger will not serve as a contact. In that case, pressing the shutter button by one step
more will turn on the metering switch.
Each mode of XG is described in accordance with the block diagram.
|Manual resistor] [Override| [Film sensitivity]
| |
Indication |. Calculation | Photoelectric |, | Brightness of scene |
circuit circuit converter |
ml el
| Memory]
| LED in finder | N
|
А.М
Release
circuit
7
Standard resistor |
Voltage detecting 7
circuit Logarithmic Mode selector circuit Exclusive strobo |
| B.C ci expansion
| f circuit ]
| Self-timer |
Control |_
circuit B. À
Self-indication
circuit
,
Control
magnet
у
| Indication LED |
L
Reset
switch
® Automatic exposure control system
1.
Metering system
In the auto exposure control system of XG, the film sensitivity, aperture, and exposure
correction value are preset. The exposure time is automatically determined according
to these values and the brightness of the scene to achieve the appropriate exposure.
When metering switch (5, or би) is turned on, the film sensitivity and exposure
correction values are mechanically added, and the values are converted into resistances,
making the rotating angle constant per step, and the aperture value is also converted
into a resistance value (logarithmic operation). These electrical amounts (resistances)
and the brightness of the scene are treated by the photoelectric converter consisting
two CdS and resistors, and the resultant electrical amount (resistance) is put into
the calculation circuit. (The converted value (brightness of scene) is subjected to
logarithmic compression during calculation.)
The result of calculation is an electrical amount (voltage) corresponding to the expo-
sure time, which is charged into condenser (C,). Then, the exposure time is indicated
in the finder by LED through the indication circuit.
The calculation in the above is as follows:
TV : Shutter speed
: Brightness of scene
TV= (BV-AV,)+SV-P : Max. aperture value
Film sensitivity
P : Number of steps for set aperture
16
17
2. Control system
The control system of XG is more complicated than that of XE because XG employs a
system that the desired exposure is achieved when the shutter is released.
When release switch (S:) is operated, the release circuit operates to check to see
that the shutter sec. time is within the interlocking range. At the same time, the
power source voltage is checked by the voltage detecting circuit. And only when the
conditions are satisfactory, the release magnet is operated to start the mirror system.
On operation of the release magnet, the memory circuit operates to store the voltage
corresponding to the exposure time at that point into condenser (C,) for memory.
Even when the light to CdS is changed and shut off due to auto exposure control or
mirror operation, the charge voltage already stored in the condenser will not be affec-
ted at all. As the operation is further performed, the first curtain starts running and
the trigger switch operates in connection with the first curtain, then the control cir-
cuit operates to change the stored voltage into logarithmically expanded current.
Condenser (C:) is charged with the current, and when the charge voltage reaches a
certain level, the current of shutter control magnet is cut off by the function of the
control circuit, then the second curtain runs to complete the exposure. When the
exposure is completed, the mirror system is reset and the winding stop is released.
The circuit reset switch (S,) being interlocked with the winding stop turns off to
reset the release circuit.
The indication LED turns off with S; turned on. When the release button is kept
depressed, LED turns on again with reset switch (S,) OFF.
e Manual sec. time
When the speed dial is set to 1—1/1000 sec., the mode selector operates and the
standard resistor is set instead of CdS, then the film sensitivity and override resist-
ance are changed over to manual resistor. Also, the diaphragm resistor is released
from the circuit and the power supply to the indication circuit is cut off, hence the
indication LED does not light up.
When metering switch (Sı or Su) is turned on, the calculation is performed by the
standard resistor and manual resistor, then voltage corresponding to the set sec. time
is charged into condenser (C,). Next, when release switch (S:) is turned on, the
power source voltage is checked by the voltage detecting circuit, then the release
magnet is operated. The operations, after that, are the same as for the control system
in auto mode.
When XG is used with manual sec. time, shutter sec. time is memorized, So, the shutter
is controlled at the initially set speed even when the set speed is changed during
shutter operation.
® Bulb mode
When the speed dial is set to “В”, the mode selector operates to turn off the power
source holding circuit, and power supply to the indication circuit is also cut off, then
the indication LED does not light up. Next, when release switch (S;) is turned on, t
the power source voltage is checked by the voltage detecting circuit, and then the
release magnet is operated. As the operation continues, the trigger switch operates,
but the bulb is given priority by (Ss) over control circuit, therefore, the shutter
control magnet keeps operating while the release button is depressed, then the second
curtain is stopped. When the release button is returned to the original position,
release switch (S;) is turned off and the power source holding circuit is also off,
therefore, the shutter control magnet turns off thus completing the exposure.
o Strobe auto
When the exclusive strobo has been completely charged, the mode selector circuit is
shifted to Strobo Auto, then the signal from the strobo enters the indication circuit
and control circuit; blinking indication of “60” is given by the indication circuit and
the exposure at the strobo-tuned speed (1/60) is done by the control circuit when the
shutter is released. (When the bulb is used, however, the auto changeover to the tuned
speed is not performed by the function of the mode selector.)
Indication When used in auto mode, auto sec. time is indicated until completion of
charge, but the changeover operation of the mode selector causes the indication signal
on the camera side to turn off, and then “60” is turned on and off by the signal on the
strobo side. When used in manual mode, the indication is off, therefore the indication
“60” is turned on and off by the signal on the strobo side on completion of strobo
charging.
Speed auto changeover---When released on completion of strobo charging, the releasing
magnet operates to start the first curtain. At that time, the control circuit instant-
aneously operates to turn off the control magnet with the strobe signal, but the control
magnet is kept ON by the strobo signal. As the operation continues, the synchro switch
turns on when the first curtain nearly completes its running, then the strobo flashes,
the signal from the strobo to the control magnet stops, the control magnet turns off,
then the second curtain runs and the mode selector also returns to the original position.
® Electronic SELF
When the SELF changeover switch is set to “SELF”, the mode selector operates to
change the composition of the release circuit to the circuit for self-timer.
When release switch (S;) is operated, the selfcircuit operates and then LED for SELF
operation indication (LED for B.C indication is used) blinks at constant intervals.
After release switch operation, the release circuit operates 8—12 seconds later to
release the shutter. Then the signal is given to the self indicator circuit by the
release circuit (self circuit) 1/4 (about 2.5sec.) before the total self-time length.
The self-timer operation indicating LED then blinks at faster intervals, thus giving a
previous notice for shutter release.
® Transistor switch
A conventional mechanical switch was operated by the movement of the release button
or mirror, and the setting was maintained mechanically. Chattering was liable to occur
when the switch turned on in particular. In the case of a transistorized switch, having
a composition as illustrated below, the input (from circuit B) is electrically applied to
the transistor to turn on and off. Also, the setting is retained by maintaining the input
level. Since a transistor swith has no contact, it does not include mechanically operat-
ing parts and assures excellent durability being free from chattering.
Circuit B|
| Circuit А |
|
19
C. Description of circuit
The circuit of XG is explained in accordance with the block diagram.
1. Mode selector circuit
This is the general name for circuits which select the mode in accordance with the
switch operation or external signal (signal from strobo).
Auto mode: Se, So Su: A side S gr. ON
Manual mode: Зв, S,, Sa’ M side S pu... ON
Bulb mode: Ss. Sos SM side $ ; ---* OFF
Exclusive strobo mode:
On completion of strobo charge, the shutter speed control signal enters the control
circuit and the “60” LED blinking indication signal enters the indication circuit
respectively through the contact shoe.
Electronic SELF mode: S,-:----SELF side
2. Metering switch (Touch switch)
The switch (S,) operates when touch switch (S,,) and shutter button are lightly
pressed (about 0.5 mm).
Touch switch (S,,):
The periphery and the center of shutter button are electrodes. When it is touched,
the resistance between the electrodes decreases (o—several M ohms).
This is electrically detected Tr,, Tr,, and then Tr, operate) and then power is
supplied to the metering circuit.
5 u
Metering
(Touch SW.) EITHER
Tr,
3. Voltage detecting circuit
If the power source voltage becomes lower than the specification during photography,
Tr turns off and the release circuit stops working. The basic construction is as shown
at left.
The B.C circuit is the same as this in principle of operation. It uses B.C indicating
LED instead of release circuit.
SW.
Release
circuit
4. Metering operation circuit
This circuit converts the change in brightness into the resistance of CdS. adds the
aperture value and film sensitivity information, performs logarithmic compression, and
puts out the signal to the indication circuit and memory circuit. |
20
Auto Mode:
It consists of CdS and two resistors. Even if the resistance of CdS circuit
changes (the brightness of the scene changes), the voltage applied to the circuit
is kept constant by the operational amplifier, thus making the current (i ,)
proportional to the brightness. The current (i:), SV and AV information from the
resistors are treated by the operational as voltage corresponding to the exposure
time. The voltage is applied to the memory circuit and indication circuit through
the level shift circuit (including VR:, VR;).
Manual Mode:
When the mode is shifted to Manual, CdS circuit is switched to standard resistor
(VR,) to make current (i) constant. Also, the brush of SV resistor is switched
to that of TV resistor (resistor is used). Therefore, the output to the memory
circuit varies in accordance with the position of the brush for TV resistor.
To memory circuit
Operational |__
amplifier VR,
SV M
= VR;
To indication circuit
. Indication circuit
The indication circuit is a combination of comparators, which compares the output of
calculation circuit and the standard voltage created in the indication circuit. When the
values are close to each other, the corresponding LED is lighted. When the output of
calculation circuit is between standard voltages intermediate range), two LED's are
lighted.
The output of calculation circuit is compared with the standard voltage by comparators
in the indication circuit (IC 2). When the values are close to each other, the corres-
ponding LED is lighted. When the value is in an intermediate range, the outputs are
given from two comparators to two LED's to turn them on at the same time.
When the over-range warning LED is lighted the over-range lock signal is given to the
release circuit to lock the release. Also, when the signal for charge completion is
emitted from exclusive strobo (8668), the comparator is turned off (LED OFF), then
LED “60” is turned on end off by the signal.
Va < Vb < Ve € Vd € Ve
Standard voltage
Calculation cirewit out put
Com — Com- Com— Com= Com-
paralor a parator | parator| |parator & parator
Strobo signal input terminal
po Indication LED
1/60
Over-range warning
| Release circuit |
6. Magnetic release
With the contact piece attracted by the permanent magnet, the permanent magnet is
temporarily demagnetized. Then the contact piece operates to release the mirror box.
Condenser C, is charged through R, beforehand. When Tr, in operated by the release
circuit, condenser C, serves to create a magnetic field, opposite to that of the perma-
nent magnet, on the magnets provided around the permanent magnet. Then the permanent
magnet is temporarily demagnetized thus releasing the contact piece.
| Release circuit
7. Over-rang lock
When release switch (S;) is turned ON, С; is charged at a high speed, and the release
circuit operates on completion of charge. In the case of over-range non-interlocking
operation, C, is discharged not to operate the release circuit. When over-range LED
is lighted in the indication circuit, Tr operates as well and C, is shortcircuited at
both ends. Therefore, С; will not be discharged and the release circuit will not work.
Tr Release circuit |
Ñ o Es
Indication circuit
8. Memory circuit
This circuit stores the output of calculation circuit into condenser (C,) through VR,
and Tr switch.
The calculation circuit output (voltage corresponding to shutter speed) is charged into
condenser (C,) through VR; and Tr SW. But Tr SW. is turned OFF when Tr, is
turned ON. and the calculation circuit is isolated from condenser (C,). Then the
shutter speed is memorized.
Calculation circuit
10.
11,
22
Logarithmic expansion circuit
The memorized voltage cannot be used as it is because it has been logarithmically
compressed. It must be changed to the original value. (This is called “logarithmic
expansion”. )
When the first curtain runs and trigger switch (S,) turns off, Tr SW. is activated
to operate Tr for expansion. The size of current (IC) flowing in Tr for expansion
varies depending on the voltage charge in C,. When the charge voltage of C, is
increased by 18 mV, the current is doubled (characteristic of Tr). Also, С, is charged
by the current flowing in Tr for expansion, and when the charge voltage reaches a
certain level, the control circuit operates causing the second curtain to run.
Control cirevit |
| Tr for expansion
с, Trigger awitch |
a +18 4 18 + JHm V
Control circuit
In the logarithmic expansion circuit, condenser (C,) for time constant is charged by
the current subjected to logarithmic expansion. The shutter speed is controlled by the
charge voltage. When C; has been charged up to a certain level, the comparator opera-
tes to turn off Tr, and then the shutter control magnet is turned OFF. Then the
second curtain is released to start running.
Power source holding circuit
This circuit holds the power source until the end of shutter operation even when the
release switch is turned off during operation of the camera.
When release switch (S,) is turned ON, Tr operates to supply power to the release
circuit and metering circuit, starting up each part. When release switch (S,) is
turned OFF, power source is held by the function of Tr, the same as with S, ON.
With release completed, the set lever returns and circuit reset switch (S,) is turned
OFF, then the power holding circuit is also reset.
Tr;
Helease circuit
Metering circuit
1b д
23
12. Bulb mode
A bulb switch (Ss) is installed in the power source holding circuit. On turning off
of the holding circuit, priority is given to “В” over the control circuit. And second
curtain release is done by release switch (S;).
When the shutter speed dial is set to “B”, bulb switch (S,) is turned OFF and the
metering operation circuit is shifted to Manual. Next, when release switch (S2) is
turned ON, the voltage is detected to operate the release circuit, and the shutter
opens. While release switch (S,) is ON, T, operates and Mg, is ON (open). When
release switch (S,) turns off, power supply to the control circuit is cut off because
the power source holding circuit is OFF. Then the shutter control magnet (Mgı) turns
off and the second curtain starts running.
F4 Fr
[Cont rol circuit
Metering circuit
Release circuit
т, ea
13. Magnetic SELF
14,
For ordinary photography, the release circuit is operated ав С; is charged (high speed).
The circuit composition and the shutter speed have been changed in this self-timer.
When the mode selector switch is set to “Selftimer”, the self switch (S4) turns ON
and Tr switch turns OFF. Next, when release switch (S,) is turned on, C, is charged
through Су. And the release circuit operates 8~12 seconds later to activate the
release magnet to operate the shutter. The indication LED blinks by the function of
the SELF indication circuit consisting of C, and resistors in series. When the charge
voltage of C, has reached a certain level, the composition of indication circuit changes
causing the blinking intervals of LED to become faster.
mame ee ee ee ee Se — e
SR : Le eirenit | {
1
|
— = чении!
rere
SELF indication circuit
Remote- control
In ordinary photography, metering switch (S, or Su) turns ON and release switch
(S,) turns ON and then the shutter is operated. In remote control operation, the
metering switch does not turn ON, therefore power is supplied to the metering circuit
after release switch (S;) is turned ON,
16,
24
Winder control function
Unlike XD, XG is not furnished with a winder switch but provided with the signal from
the reset switch (S,) for the purpose of winder control. The winder operates when
the winder terminal voltage is zero, and it stops when voltage exists.
The winder terminal voltage is 2V with S, ON, and OV with the switch OFF. Also,
S, is ON with winding completed, and OFF with shutter release completed.
|
5.
Winder terminal
Strobo Auto
The circuit receives the signal of stobo (8668) and indicates for strobo charge com-
pletion in the finder and changes the shutter speed to the strobo-tuned speed.
When the charge of strobo has been completed, pulse signal enters the signal contact
on the camera side from the signal contact on the strobo side. The pulse operates Q,
~Q;. Q, turns off the indication circuit, Q, holds the magnet, and О, charge the
condenser (C;) for time constant in the control circuit at a high speed (approx. 1/
1000 sec.). Also, Q, operates at 2V and doesn't at 1.6V. Therefore, indication LED
(“60”) turns on and off.
When the shutter is operated and X contact is closed, the strobo flashes and the
strobo signal goes out. Then Q; which held the magnet is turned off and the second
curtain starts running, thus completing the exposure.
To indication circuit
To magnet holder
= Strobo signal
Strobo (8668) |
ss lh
To control circuit
To indication “60”
A contact u
77
Strobo signal
Metering SW. 5, Lal
Auto speed indication al
60” blinking AN
Q,
Release SW. S,
Shutter
X contact
F,
17. XG Time Chart
e
: fc pele do.
E Magneti = } $ 7 I 5
Release start agretic release =
2 S; ON Trigger 5 À A] 3 2 E
3 = в 5 Е: 2
= | fic appearance | я шо = E z
(Auto, Manual) :
5. Reset SW. == y ] f
Su Touch SW. J 1 —
5, Metering SW, J | rm”
Tr, Metering Tr Lad | NT
Tr SW. Memory SW. [5 1 —"
С, Memory condenser it 8 ] i
Si Release SW. 7 |
Tra Release Tr
Ci Release delay —
Tra Release Tr u ami li
Maz Release magnet MN
Tr, Shutter magnet Tr _ |
Mal Shutter magnet )
S, Trigger SW. 1 f
Tr SW. Counting SW. | |
с, Condenser for | 1
time constant i
5 Synchro contact
Ken das speed indication г 7 г r
Shutter ic Z = °C /
(Bulb)
5; Release SW. de |
Mal J L
Try. Tr, J L_
(Remote Control)
Su Remote control SW. J à
Tr,. Tr, ] L_
Tr, J —
(Sell-Timer)
S, 1
Tr, ]
Ce ak Pr
Tra a ul | zise =
LED indication Zap ul
(Exclusive Strobo) Charge complete
8668 charge — E
Strobo signal nu === I] ru
Shutter speed indication Г] FL
"607 speed indication Sul
D. Switch characteristics
on completion of 2nd curtain
running.
Mark N F = Operati Before | During After
i
E — anes dei release | exposure | exposure
Si Metering | Turns on metering operation Interlocked with shutter (OFF) (ON) (OFF)
switch circuit to start metering, and | release shaft
indicates shutter sec. time in
finder in AUTO mode.
5: Release | Starts operating each circuit. | Interlocked with shutter (OFF) (ON) (OFF)
switch release.
53 Trigger | Starts time counting in Turns OFF just after start ON OFF ON
switch Manual and Auto. of lst curtain
(Sutter block)
5. Кезе! Prevention of misoperation Turns ON on completion of ON ON OFF
switch during winding, circuit winding.
resetting, and winder control. | Winder operates at OFF.
5; Bulb Circuit is shifted for Bulb. Interlocked with speed dial.
switch (OFF at Bulb)
Ss. 5; | Mode interlocked with selftimer
switch dial.
В.С Checks battery
ON Supplies power to metering
switch,
OFF Cuts off power to circuit.
SELF- Circuit is shifted for self-
TIMER timer.
Sa Auto- Circuit changeover for Auto CdS circuit OFF at Manual
5, switch TV (Speed) circuit ON at
Manual.
5. SV (ASA) circuit OFF at
Manual.
So AV (Diaphragm) circuit at
Manual.
Su Touch Same as 5, ON with shutter button
switch touched.
5, Synchro | Strobo operation Turns ON on completion of OFF ON OFF
switch lst curtain running, and OFF
un o 144 : "E (Uns 1) Seep 59 ОЛ —s … <“
dope wrens pay 204 : td (UM SI) vermrealpe аа зори 204 yA
iD dd мел 531191 : "у (AY EC) md wii 204 : #5 (UN Sl) мана GS may №1 А
(0000) ew wes Ц 01-107 #4 : ‘y (AN 571) reg: 17 (UM 000) weunmipe 55 М 204 A
(UM C—-971) wei menu me: тЫ (4% 001) mu ande 204 : I als prada TEE ajos ‘1
(Ve) tentes Pois (107 #4 : ¿y CAN o a BL Ll? : 17 up na зан 20) joo]
(UM OUT) u depp ey: ry (a? EY) ype pee 204 : ‘7 desp ala ye qo] ма vey : ‘1
(UN 000) Te: ty AA Seren pre seit depp 261 : 17 mr jo
(DOM ON-H) m ле: ‘y im ms sai dj : 17 pues Lens eyes | tj
(ONG) eum fey]: Uy (gig) La wy: In ques ем "j
(ONO 1-2 Y See ge ty Duppsepsnuj-umm mine 30 11 : 21 oe ee эре Ae ae Р
(ONL T~ CI ‘à E ee (In Oe | 051
me: q pues sm pag : ty ij : 251
m AE 88 #1 : 01 Mop pardo 15421: ‘1 СД 20 teste оны Berna = 15]
-м
“
L A
+10
3 To:
№8 $<
O
il
À.
= з ya J >? |
$ N | ii
à Ам AS
£ £ 7 3OHS 19V1NOI |
) h > i | 5
T < é
6 :
E y
Ls
2 —
АК
2
=
LJ
=
наци ST OU EU Ni 61 La |
KE eo: & TT)
PR $ “4 a ‘г |8 dec 3.
Le vt F4 и ps | | 21 s17 uf
CN Рева И г} = E qu. J
E ell
| ally
Ces JJ E С Y С è — om |
T CE <“ A Z
| y || ? 2 2 2 2 2 JE ‘un
55 — < Е e J =
М
ше8ер ymono
ta
XG 7 (2006-100, -200)
XG 2 (2006-300, -400) Parts List
XG-E (2006-500, -600)
. This parts list, based upon the final model of 2006 series, includes (1) parts modified or discontinued in the course
of production and temporarily used, and their interchangeability; (2) parts for models after 2006 series, which can
also be used for 2006 series.
e Regarding those modified in the course of production, if they are interchangeable. only the new parts are menti-
oned.
. Part No. on the exploded view of the parts list is sometimes provided with @, €, or Ж.
@ : Modified in the course of production, and individually not interchangeable with previous type.
® : Discontinued in the course of production, newly added or temporarily used.
* : Attached to screws or special screw numbers, showing the use for defective screw hole.
Regarding those provided with @ or ®. be sure to refer to the specified page. Also, do not remove the part from
the dody to which the @-marked part is attached.
=D IN A 1142006 ОНЕТЬЯ MAR, DEREFTEF, №. О-о, Hi
PEO MAS. QD2006 7% LEO AAT. OT SALA AB. LA ED, QONKe Ms TEL PTE!) +
+
оао со LENA SMSIL, Ио PML TOE Tt,
A= 1 A OR MMM OA 121409, ФХР оо SMS AE ET,
Ol) ERE TEE EN, ООН 4 TE ORE EOE”,
ФЕ EARP leak, PASE, lt ANC (PAA ah,
HAD HL. хо CORONA, БГАЛАНЕНЕЛ С Tu tT.
OOO coa ao Tis EF for à M A IO AE BEAL T Farı. X BINHAFIHSENTEG SH
Fetes, TOR IRREAL TERRE LUTTF au
$4
Part No. Page
2006-0110-- 3
2006-0116 3
2006-0120--- 6
2006-0130--- 2
2006-0131 2
2006-0132 2
2006-0133 2
2006-0134----------- 2
2006-0140--- 3
2006-0151 9-1,9-2
2006-0152-----9-1,9-2
2006-0153-----9-1,9-2
2006-0180---------- 19
2006-0183---------- 19
2006-0184---------- 19
2006-0271---------- 16
2006-0272---—----- 16
2006-0273---------- 16
2006-0274---------- 16
2006-0276- -16
2006-028 1----------- 1
2006-0290----------- 1
2006-0291 -- 19
2006-0295 1
2019-0310 -14
2006-0325 33
Part No. Page
2019-0326- 14
2006-0338 -13
_ 2006-0340 14
2006-0350 14
2019-0360- 14
2006-0375 1
2006-0376 -19
2006-0381----------12
2006-0382-- 12
2006-0383-- 12
2006-0384 12
2006-0385-- 12
2006-0386 12
2006-0396-- 1
2006-0402 17
2006-0415-- 1
E A 1
2006-0417-- 19
2006-020
2006-0440------ 1
2006-0503 11
2006-0504-- 7-1
2006-0509 7-1
2006-0521 ssh
2006-0522 ---10
2006-0523---------- 10
Part No. Page
2006-0524 10
2006-0527 9-2
2006-0531 --10
2006-0532 -10
2006-0541---------- 10
2006-0542 10
2006-0558 ii
2006-0561- ne:
2006-0562--- 11
2006-0571- 9-1
2019-0580---- 8
2006-0585-- 9-1
2006-0586-- 6
2006-0592 7-i
2006-0595- 4
2006-0881 4
2006-1005----------- 6
2006-1006----- 9-1,9-2
2006-1008----- 9-1,9-2
2006-1009 1
2005-1010 6
2006-1011--- £
2006-1012 15
2006-1014-----9-1,9-2
2006-1015----- 4
4)
Part No. Page
2006-1016------ --4
2006-1017--- 2
2006-1018 2
2006-1019-- zu
2006-1020- 15
0031-1027 15
0031-1034-- 15
2006-1041- 15
2006-1042 15
2006-1043--- 15
2006-1052----------- 2
2006-1053----------- 2
2006-1054--- 2
2005-1061----------- 6
2006-1061----------- 2
2005-1062----------- 6
2006-1062-- --2
2005-1063- -6
2006-1064-- u
2006-1066---------- 14
2006-1068----------- 2
2006-1069-- 2
2006-1074-- 5
2006-1077 -15
2007-1105--- 15
2006-1106----------- 3
Part No. Page
2006-1108 3
2006-1110 15
2006-1111 —---15
2006-1112 15
2006-1114---------- “3
2006-1115 3
2006-1116 3
2006-1117 3
2006-1119---- 3
2006-1314 19
2006-1322---- ---19
2006-1324 19
2006-1344---------- 19
2006-1346 19
2006-1352 19
2006-1402 4
2006-1422 4
2006-1442 3
2006-2005---- 1
2006-2008- 16
2006-2009 =l6
2006-2012 --16
2006-2014 ---1
2006-2015 --16
2006-2016 16
Part No. Page
2006-2017 16
2006-2020----------- 1
2006-2022----------- 1
2006-2023 1
2006-2035-- 8
2006-2257-- um)
2006-2291----- 9-1,9-2
2006-3003 1
2006-3004----------- 1
2006-3009---------- 14
2005-3010 1
2006-3010----------- 5
2006-3012---------- 14
2006-3013-- 1
2006-3017-- 14
2006-3020---------- 14
2006-3021---------- 14
2019-3024----------- 5
2006-3025----------- 1
2006-3027 ---14
2006-3028 ---14
2006-3029---------- 14
2006-3032-- 13
2006-3037-- 13
2006-3040- --14
И:
Part No. Page
2006-3041 -13
2006-3042 Lt
2006-3050 14
2017-305 1-----~----14
2006-3052 -----13
2006-3053 13
2006-3055--- 13
2006-3056----------14
2006-3301 1
2006-3303- 1
2006-3304 15
2006-3307 =========== 1
2006-3308 E
2006-3309 15
2006-3310 ]
2006-3311 1
2006-3312 ee
2006-3320 1
2006-3404 12
2006-3407---------- 12
2006-3409--- 12
2006-3410---------- 12
2006-3411 15
2006-3414 --12
2006-3415 12
2006-3416 12
Part No. Page
2006-3421---- 13
2006-4013 1
2006-4016---- 1
2006-401 7---- 2
2006-4019----- 9-1,9-2
2006-4021--------- 9-1
2006-4022 9-2
2006-4023 --]
2006-4025-- -4
2006-4216----------- 5
2006-4221-- 4
2006-4222----- 4
2006-4252--------- 9-1
2006-4253---------- 16
2006-4254----------- 4
2006-4255----- 9-1,9-2
2006-4256- --2
2006-4260---------- 17
2005-4270---------- 16
2006-4301- -17
2006-4302---------- 17
2006-4303---------- 17
2006-4304-- 17
2006-5003 7-2
Part No. Page
2006-5004-- 7-2
2006-5005-----7-1,7-2
2006-5006 4
2006-5007----- 7-1,7-2
2006-5008----------- 4
2006-5009-- 7-2
2006-5010 7-2
2006-5011----- 7-1, 7-2.
2006-5012 7-2
2006-5013----- 7-1,7-2
2006-5014----- 7-1,7-2
2006-5015 ----- 7-1,7-2
2006-5016----- 7-1,7-2
2006-5017----- 7-1,7-2
2006-5018----- 7-1,7-2
2006-5019- 11
2006-5021---------- 11
2006-5023- -11
2006-5024 7-1
2006-5027 ========-- 11
2006-5028 11
2006-5029-- -11
2006-5030---------- 11
2006-5031- 7-1
2006-5032 7-1
2006-5033-- 11
Part No. Page
2006-5037 11
2006-5038 9-1,9-2
2006-5039-----7-1, 7-2
2006-5042: 10
2006-5044--- 10
2006-5046 10
2006-5051----------10
2006-5107-- 10
2006-5110 11
2006-5111 =
2006-5112-- 11
2006-5113- -21
2006-5114 --11
2006-5116----------11
2006-5117---------- 11
2006-5118---------- 11
2006-51 19-=========- 11
2006-5 120---------- 11
2006-5803----- 7-1,7-2
2006-5805----- 7-1,7-2
2006-5806---------- 1]
2006-5809-----7-1,7-2
2006-8401---------- 18
2006-8402---------- 18
Part №. Раде
2006-8403-------17,18
2006-8404 18
2006-8406 18
2006-8408 17,18
2006-8409 ----18
2006-8411---- 18
2006-8413 18
2006-8414- 18
2006-8417 18
2006-9001---------- 12
2006-9004 8
2005-9005 9-1
2006-9005 9-2
2006-901 1---------- 14
2006-9012 -14
2006-9102 ---15
2006-9103----- 9-1,9-2
2006-9105- 16
2006-9106 -----11
2006-9107----- 9-1,9-2
2006-9108-- 14
2006-9109 3
2006-9110--------- 1,5
2006-9112---- ---2
2006-9113-- 5
Part №. Раде
2006-9120 15
2006-9121----------15
2006-9245 2
2006-9246 2
2006-9402 ---14
2006-9405 10
2006-9409 ---15
2006-9441 = 14
Screw
9611-1616-12----- --11
9611-1625-07--8,9-1,9-2
9611-1640-01- 5
9611-2032-04- 6
9611-2040-07 5
9612-1416-07------- 12
9612-1616-02------9-2
9612-1616-06--6,9-1,1
1
9612-1625-07----- 8,9-1
9612-1628-07----- 3,6,8
9612-1635-07-------3,6
9612-1675-07 16
9612-1685-07 3
9612-2065-01-------- 15
9613-1418-01 12
9613-1645-07--------- 8
9613-1650-04 2
À,
DE — um es
Part No. Page
9622-1630-01--7-1,7-2
9691-1728-07 14
9691-2040-07 13
9691-2045-07 12
9691-2050-07 15
9692-1740-02---7-2,15
9692-1740-07--3,7-1,7-2
9692-1745-01 3
9692-2040-07 14
9692-2050-07------- 14
9693-1740-04-- l
9693-1740-06------- 19
9693-1740-07------7-1
9693-1750-02-------- 1
9693-2040-07------ 7-2
9693-2045-01------- 12
9762-1740-07-------- 5;
E-ring
9721-0080-13-------11
9721-0120-13---9-1,12
9721-0150-13--10,11,12
9721-0200-13------- 13
Steel ball
9758-0200-00 1
Part No. Page
Washer
9791-1625-43 19
9791-4258-50- 1
9792-2050-40 10
9793-1950-86 3
9793-2038-50-- 14
9793-2140-40 -10
9794-2050-20 10
9794-3858-20 11
9798-3155-87 2
L.E.D
9353-2642-01----8,9-1
Diode
9361-5631-01 17
Transistor
9363-1032-01 17
Fixed resistor
9422-1026-32 4
9422-1046-32-------17
9422-1046-39------- 17
9422-1226-32 4
9422-1516-32 4
Part No. Page
9422-1526-32------ --4
9422-1826-32-----4, 17
9422-2036-39 17
9422-2046-39------- 17
9422-2216-32--------4
9422-2236-39------- 17
9422-2416-62------- 17
9422-2436-39 17
9422-2716-32 4
9422-2736-39------ -17
9422-3016-62------- 17
9422-3036-39 17
9422-3316-32-- 4
9422-3326-32------- 17
9422-3336-39------- 17
9422-3916-32----- 4,17
9422-3936-39------- 17
9422-47 16-32-------- 4
9422-4736-39------- 17
9422-5616-32-------- 4
9422-5636-39 17
9422-6806-32------- 17
9422-6816-32-- 4
9422-6836-39------- 17
9422-8216-32----- 4,17
9431-1037-31 17
9431-1057-31-
9431-1257-31=-======-4
9431-1557-31 4°
9431-3047-31 17
9431-3347-31 4
9431-3947-31- 4
9431-4747-31- 4
9431-5647-31 4
9431-6847-31 4
9431-8247-31 -------- 4
Variable resistor
9472-1529-38------- 17
9472-1539-38 17
9472-2049-38------- 17
Condenser
9531-1575-61- 17
9531-2265-31- 17
9531-3365-31 17
9531-4765-31 17
9534-1555-33 17
9534-1555-63 17
9535-1555-31------- 17
9535-1555-36 i7
Part No.
17
9535-6845-31
17
9563-4738-31-
40
XG
‘XG
XG-
were О
(8) 2006-2257-81 @
Ra
79 1-4258-50 [№
2006-9111-02
200€- 3004-01
\ 2006-9111-81
@ 2006-3320-81
(2005-3010-01) >
? 2006-0375-01
e
(9693-1750-02)| 8
a y
M 2006-9119-61
Ti dí
2000-2010 ED)
& |
a
2006-9110-02
7 CODE No. 2006-100, -200
2 CODE No. 2006-300, -400
E CODE No. 2006-500, -600
@ 2006-3311-03
(P21)
@ 2006-3301-04
ES (P21)
|
2006-3310-02
(E) 2006-3307-01 $
+
| "
: 2006-0396-02
2006-4013-03
2006-0295-01
2006-2005-02
9758-0200-00
(x2)
@ 3025-61, (© 2257-81
Attach to bodies used 1M dust y places.
NICHOSUMTEHTSRF- Kati,
(9) 4023-81
Use for bodies of which self-timer dial
operation 15 bad.
tA PF PATAONHOOBW E F—K EHTS,
@) 3320-81
Use for bodies of which winding lever
friction 15 weak.
2 LV-i- 7) 71 YORK F—ICMHITS,
(O y7y1-4258-50
Use for bodies of which seinding lever
touches Тор cover
A | м: | ф-"- Кат Кито,
= a
) =
| © 2006-3025-81 > 2006-0416-B2
| a
pal J 9693-1740-04 (x2)
> = Ж 9693-1750-04
Part No.
2006-0281-02
2006-0290-01
2006-0295-01
2006-0375-01
(2005-3010-01)
(9693-1750-02)
2006-0396-01
2006-04 15-01
2006-0416-01
2006-0440-02
2006- 1009-02
2006-2005-01
2006-2014-03
2006-2020-01
2006-2022-03
2006-2023-02
2006- 3003-02
200€- 3004-01
2006-3013-03
2006-3301-04
2006-3303-03
2006-3307-01
2006-33 10-02
¿006-3311-02
2006-4013-03
2006-4016-01
2006-9110-02
2006-9111-81
2006-9119-81
9693-1740-04
9758-0200-00
-006-2257-81
2006-3025-81
2006-3320-81
2006-4023-81
9791-4258-50
Part Name
Shutter release button set
Shutter speed dial/Function selector Y + y 4-4 YA |
Shutter speed dial
Winding lever set
Winding lever knob
Phillips type tapping screw
Rewinding handle set
Battery holder set
Bottom cover set.
Self-timer change holder set tr 7 YUREhKkrZF—- ty}
Eye-piece lens frame
ASA dial
ASA spring
Shutter release button pressure
Shutter release button spring
Shutter release button cap
Winding lever pressure
Winding lever friction
Top cover set nut B
Rewinding knob
Rewindng handle spring
Rewinding handle receiver
Top cover pressure nut
Rewinding knob screw
Self-timer dial
self-timer dial click spring
Screw-A
Screw-B
Tapping screw
Phillips type tapping screw
Steel ball
Washer
Washer
Washer
Self dial space washer
Washer
Vr» i-Mt>P
Very 2 HA AIR
ЖУТЬ
#LVN- EST
TERR AY EYAL
Ж БЕ LOY Fare k
ВЛ e |
T7’'-—-+t>,!}
EP
ASA 55
ASA ATV >
Vr y F—-MiHPR
Ve y ABAD) AY
SA 477
# bv os — Mi
# LUVA 700 V 3 7
Lar—im7+> PB
ЖА
HB Loy Frs
Hh Lav ka eit
ЕЯ
ЖЕ AES
ELITIAAÂTA
ENTIAS MI » ¿SP
FRIEDEX A
TER 2 >» ÉvhL
AF—NMK—N
HET» © + —A
BET» Y + —B
ÆEVS-ME7 > Yr—
tae 7 KA Wie)
MO » Y + —
RH pr pp
JD HR PR rr PP PR PR RR RR Pp OP Pp po po po bs ps
a
PO Po
PJ
"oe... nn u
Hae
XG 7 CODE No. 2006-100, -200
XG 2 CODE No. 2006-300, -400
XG-E CODE No. 2006-500, -600
Assy. Part No.
@ 2006-0130-03 (P22) 8 IR (9613-1650-04)
[9 |
|
2006-1053-03
ha é
Li = Ha, la
SS i (2006-1052-02 )
Pn
je 2006-9245-04) (P24)
fl @1 2006-9246-02) (23)
@ ( 2006-1062-02) a!
(P24) |
ein os L
(P23)
(2006-0131-01) ex
(2006-4017-02)
(2006-1018-02) <
1 2006-4756-03]
|
De (2006- 1054-03} (P24)
=
(ep ( 2006- 1069-02 )
SS @ 2006- 1068-01 ) (Pea)
E O (9798-3155-87) (P24)
7 к Assy. Part №,
Assy. Part No. [a @ 2006 1061-02) (P24) y
0 2006-0133-03 (P22) ® 2006-0134-03 (P22)
|
& (2006-9112-02)
Part No.
2006-0130-03
2006-0133-03
2006-0134-03
(2006-0131-01 )
(2006-0132-02)
(2006-1017-04)
(2006-1018-02)
(2006-1052-02)
(2006-1054-03)
(2006-1061-02)
(2006-1062-02)
(2006-1068-01)
(2006-1069-02)
(2006-4017-02)
(2006-4256-03)
(2006-9112-02)
(2006-9245-04)
(2006-9246-02)
(9613-1650-04)
(9798-3155-87)
2006- 1053-03
Part ‘Name
Top cover set for XG 7
Top cover set for XG 2
Top cover set for XG-E
Shutter speed dial set
Accessory shoe base set
Self-timer indication plate
Counter window
Accessory shoe
Accessory shoe set plate
Contact-D
Contact operation pin
Contact-E
Contact isolation sheet
Self-timer return spring-B
Top cover isolation tape
Contact pressure screw
Contact-A
Contact-B
Phillips type screw
Washer
Accessory shoe spring
XG THE »H+—+_> }
XG 2A E Hu |
XG—ER 5 2#-*—+ > |
Vr IZ KARA?
TIFF VU2 VAT BES }
cn? ts RR
WVYA—B
TIA) —V2—
T7r)- VA AA
31/29 НО
2/27 PFP EH
УРАЛ E
727’, KB 7—}
EXTALAYAJLSP-B
E» —Bhbr-—+
IYSIAbHIT MAL
У? ЕДА
2/27 Е ЖАВ
FR Dh С
MO » + —
ТРУ Ya ARA
XG 7 CODE No. 2006-100, -200
ХС 2 CODE No. 2006-300, -400
XG-E CODE No. 2006-500, -600
2006-0110-01 (Soft leather)
2006-0116-11 (Hard leather)
(2006- 1106-02 }
(2006-1106-01)
|
(2006-1114-03)
(Soft leather)
(2006- 1442-01)
irard leather)
0 G 2006-D140-03
2247 -42006-9109-01 1
Z er
o
Se
LS pa]
(2006-1119-01) €
(2006-1116-02)
u
Part No. Part Name
2006-0110-01 Back cover set Г ЭМ
(2006-1106-02) Hinge axis А e y ; MA
(2006-1108-01) _ Hinge spring EYYPATI YZ
(2006-1114-03) Back cover leather REM SE
(2006-1115-03) Conversion scale | ASA, DIN в
(2006-1116-02) Back cover light shield plate RS Eth
(2006-1117-01) Back cover pocket EX *+s> |
(2006-1119-01) Back cover light shield plate-B HEXLAH—B
(2006-9109-01) Hinge axis A screw КЕЕЛУМШЕЮЕХ
2006-0116-11 Back cover set K&t
(2006-1442-01) Back cover leather REkE
2006-0140-03 Pressure plate set EX +2 |
XG 7 CODE No. 2006-100, -200
XG 2 CODE No. 2006-300, -400
XG-E CODE No. 2006-500, -600
9692-1740-07
x 2006-9117-81
9692-1745-01
№ 9602-1755-0]
O 0612- 1628-07
© 9612-1635-07 '
(P26) | F 9793-1950-86
9612-1685-07
(8) 2006-4221-81
9692-1740-07 (x2)
M 9602-1745-07
& @ 2006-5008-03 (P27)
EP ee cuis ve
A 50 2006-5006-01
“on,
(P27)
~
@ 2006-0595-03 (Р22,23)
2006- 1015-01
(Soft leather)
¿006- 1402-81
(Hard leather)
J li
(P26) |
(8) 2006-4222-81 : (CA See Page 16
(P26) | >
&- © 2006-4025-01 (Paz)
2006-4254-01
d 2006-1019-03
2006- 1016-02
{Soft leatner)
2006-1422=81
(Hard leather)
X\
Part No.
2006-0595-03
2006-0881-05
2006-1015-01
2006-1016-02
2006-1019-03
2006-1402-81
2006-1422-81
2006-4025-01
2006-4254-01
2006-5006-01
2006-5008-03
2006-9117-81
9612-1628-07
9612-1685-07
9692-1740-07
9692-1745-01
9692-1745-07
9692-1755-01
9793-1950-86
2006-4221-81
2006-4222-81
CdS circu
Eye-piece
Right sid
Left side
Body leat
Right sid
Left side
Contact r
Tape-A
Eye-piece lens light shield frame
Eye-piece
er ” e =
Part Name
it base plate set
lens set
e leather
leather
her
e leather
leather
eceiver
lens pressure
Tapping screw
Phillips
Phillips
Phillips
Phillips
type screw
type screw
type tapping screw
type tapping screw
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
Washer
SW.8 sub spring
Spring hanger
CASH 45 + > |
#RvyxA+xvy |
№ (4)
№ (Æ)
WF — Ba BE
BERR (4)
Mk (=)
ли RAK — Bit
7TUFEMT 7
ENRV>XEXE
HILUX -
++АНЕ + na E
TEASER) ACL
+FRA HF ev EYAL
FENXNHA)E RL
7 9 Ye
SW.8 MHx7U YY
SW. 8 HEAT OY > ZT
Symbol Part No. Part Name Type. Qty.
R1 | 9431-3347-31 1/16W, 330K0 |”
9431-3947-31 1/16W, 390K N
9431-4747-31 1/16W, 470K Q
9431-5647-31 1//6W, 570K ()
9431-6847-31 1/16W, 680K 0 > 1
9431-8247-31 1/16W, 820K N
9431-1057-31 1/16W, 1M(
9431-1257-31 1/16W, 1.2MQ
9431-1557-31 1/16W, 1.5MII | J
R2 9422-1516-32 Fixed resistor 1/8м, 1500
9422-2216-32 1/8W, 22011
9422-2716-32 1/8w, 2700
9422-33 16-32 1/8W, 3300
9422-3916-32 1/8w, 3900
9422-4716-32 1/8w, 470 {)
9422-5616-32 1/8w, 5600 » 1
9422-6816-32 1/8w, 6800
9422-8216-32 1/8w, 8200
9422-1026-32 1/8W, 1КО
9422-1226-32 1/8w, 1.2KN
9422-1526-32 1/8w, 1.5KQ
9422-1826-32 1/8W, 1.8K()
Oty
Pl +. Pr mn ee pl
—
1
Lit y
XG 7 CODE No. 2006-100, -200
XG 2 CODE No. 2006-300, -400
XG-E CODE No. 2006-500, -600
2019-3024-01 a
u
| |
2006-9113-01 8
218
|
rd | À
u“
Part No. Part Name Qty
2006-0420-02 Battery case base plate set Lñr—_xaHR+*>» | 1
(2006-4216-04) Plus side contact EMIr—REHYy5xM 1
(9762-1740-07) . Phillips type tapping screw TEKH AZ er EYRE x
2006-3010-01 Charge lever er Yves — 1
2019-3024-01 Winder coupler PAYENT IT 1
2006-9110-02 Screw-A HIDE x A 3
2006-9113-01 Screw-E SALEOVA E 2
9611-1640-01 Phillips type screw TEA A CHA hL 3
9611-2040-07 Phillips type screw TEA HA SE AU 4
XG 7 CODE No. 2006-100, -200
XG 2 CODE No. 2006-300, -400
XG-E CODE No. 2006-500, -600
i, eo
{ See Page 7
E
#
=
| < < `. = N |
See Page 8 [7 FA | SPN 9612-1628-07 (x2)
WF a N % В 2006-1074-02
N XA SS
SL L
9612-1616-07 Ry NN
ÚS ira SE
a
=” ~~
= a. 2006-0120-02
A
Part No,
2006-0120-02
2006-0586-01
2006- 1005-03
2005-1010-01
2005-1010-81
2006-1011-05
2005-1061-81
2005- 1062-82
2005-1063-81
2006-1064-03
2006-1074-02
9611-2032-04
9612-1616-07
9612-1628-07
9612-1635-07
Part Name
Aperture coupling ring set
Lens lock button set
Front cover
Bayonet lens mount
Bayonet lens mount (-O. 1mm)
Bayonet spring
Adjustment washer-A t=0.02
Adjustment washer-B t=0.05
Adjustment washer-C t=0.1
Aperture coupling ring spring
Front cover indication
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
Qty
MH.» >? 1
VyXO» 2 tt 1
ay D 2 — 1
Sato b ER
1
23% 7 ТА (—0.1mm)
“añ kay 1
EBMERO > > y —A Зоте Г.
EBEMERO y Y + —B Some 4 ["
ДЖЕН » ve —C Some zs |:
BMY YL TAT Yves 1
Al +S — В ]
TERRACE A na С 4
TEKAANBbAL 1
FERHA SCAN с 2
TERHASA+ NAT 3
52 y
XG 7 CODE No. 2006-100, -200
XG 2 CODE No. 2006-300, -400
XG-E CODE No. 2006-500, -600
(New type]..... type fresnel lens
2006-5803 -02
@ | 2006-5007-04) (P28)
9622-1630-01 (x3)
+
’ o
8 =} @ 9693-1740-07
x 9895-1730-01
(x3) | (2006-5809-02)
9692-1740-07
M 2006-0117-81 |
Y @ 2006-5014-03 (P30) GE > 2006-0592-01
2006-5015-02
| | 2006-5018-01
@ 2006-5805-06 (P28)
$
e
a 2006-5031-01 (P30)
Part No.
2006-0504-01
(2006-5032-01)
2006-0509-01
2006-0592-01
( 2006-5005-04 )
(2006-5007-04 )
(2006-5809-02 )
2006-5011-02
2006-5013-03
2006-5014-03
2006-5015-02
2006-5016-03
2006-5017-04
2006-5018-01
2006-5024-01
2006-5031-01
2006-5039-01
2006-5803-02
2006-5805-06
2006-9117-81
9622-1630-01
9692-1740-07
9693-1740-07
9693-1750-04
Eos a
Part
Name
Penta. holder set
Packing-B
Fresnel lens holder set
Penta. receiver set
Penta. receiver
Scale plate
L.E.D mirror
Fresnel lens pressure spring
Fresnel lens holder spring
Penta. pressure
Penta. pressure
Penta. spring
Penta. pressure
L.E.D diffusion
Packing-C
Packing-A
Penta. pressure
Penta. prism
Fresnel lens
Tapping screw
Screw
(Left side)
(Right side)
plate
tape
Phillips type tapping screw
Phillips type tapping screw
Phillips type screw
AYsrnf—-+ts р
BMerhruysB
MATRIX» À
Ужур
Av 20
ВФ
Хе
RRRIFAATY AS
BARA —-ATYVysZ
NY 2 MAR (Е)
“Sy eR RK (4)
SYARRASV YS
УМА
LED thik ®
Men 7UvrC
HEEAPUSA
SLIMABEMT — 7
жи) ZA
ЖА
ЕЖЕ [2
TERE xy Ev AL
TERHA93 ERC
0-3
а
ХС 7 CODE No. 2006-100, -200
XG 2 CODE No. 2006-300, -400
XG-E CODE No. 2006-500, -600
(Previous type]..... type fresnel lens
2006-5016-03
(x2)
De 2006-5017-04
u A .
(x3) a
ou, > , 9622-1630-01 “*-. (x2)
40-0 \ | 5 Ч 2006-5039-01 7
N e Se Yy-
5 0603-2040-07 | P30);
(x2) M 0603-2050-04
692-=1740-02
M 2006-9117-81
2006-5803-02
2 Baer iru)
N
Á | |
Ds
2006-5012-01 | @ 2006-5010-01 (P29)
@ 2006-5037-01 a
(P30) SR
и O 2006-5805-04 (P28)
@ 2006-5004-05
(P27,28,30)
2 2006-5011-01 (p28)
0 2006-5009-02 (P28)
@ 2006-5003-01 (P291
Part No. Part Name
2006-5003-01 Penta. holder shield plate AVIAR RE
2006-5004-05 Penta. hodler AYARKNM SE —
2006-5005-01 Penta. receiver Ay 411
2006-5007-02 Scale plate BRE
2006-5009-02 Fresnel lens holder - MARTIAL
2006-5010-01 Fresnel lens frame MA
2006-5011-01 Fresnel lens pressure spring 2-0) CL aa AY
2006-5012-01 Space prevention plate 7 8 À AE
2006-5013-02 Fresnel lens holder spring ESB RAL—ATVY AY
2006-5014-02 Penta. pressure (Left side) ЗУ (Æ)
2006-5015-02 Penta. pressure (Right side) NY SHAR (A)
2006-5016-03 Penta. spring AYSARRAT WV YY
2006-5017-04 Penta. pressure Ay SPAR
2006-5018-01 L.E.D diffustion plate LED me
2006-5037-01 Finder packing 7TAYS—PEIS
2006-5039-01 Penta. pressure tape SNYARRREGT— 7
2006-5803-02 Penta. prism AVATUXA
2006-5805-04 Fresnel lens fe 5
2006-5809-02 L.E.D mirror JE ES №
2006-9117-81 Tapping screw
9622-1630-01 Screw EñDALFLOAC
9692-1740-02 Phillips type tapping screw TERHAS CAL
9692-1740-07 Phillips type tapping screw TFRAZ ye YReE
9693-2040-07 Phillips type tapping screw TFRAZ >» Ex nat
9693-2050-04 Phillips type screw
XG 7 CODE No. 2006-100, -200
XG 2 CODE No. 2006-300, -400
XG-E
9353-2642-0)
See Page 9
CODE No. 2006-500, -600
Page 10-11
See
9612-1628-07
5 @ 2019-0580-11 (P32)
|
9612-1625-07 (x3)
8
(x3)
9611-1625-07
(ti li RS
Part No.
2019-0580-11
2006-2035-06
2006-9004-02
9353-2642-01
9611-1625-07
9612-1625-07
9612-1628-07
9613-1645-07
MG 2 set
MG 2+ » |
Release operation lever spring ЩЖЯхХ 7) их
Release operation lever A set screw Y) — <a ftv-s—A
L.E.D
Phillips
Phillips
type
type
Phillips type
Phillips
type
screw
screw
screw
screw
L.E.D
TEAR ANB SRE
HER SAA L
TFIKAASB DAL
TEAAMbAU
Qty
58 y
XG Y CODE No. 2006-100, -200
XG 2 CODE No. 2006-300, -400
XG-E CODE No. 2006-500, -600
@ 0721-0120-13
EN
(x2) @ 2006-0585-01 (P33)
(хз)
@0612-1616-07 (P35)
ya (P34)
|
(6) 2006-4255-01
(P34)
2006-2291-01 ISS
@ 2006-0151-01
(P35)
& 2006-4019-02
7 2006- 1014-02
wwe
; I
I 2006-9103-03 & 2006-1006-03
la 2006-0152-01
4 9611-1625-07
(X2)
Part No.
2006-0151-01
2006-0152-01
2006-0153-02
2006-0571-01
2006-0585-01
2006- 1006-03
2006- 1008-04
2006- 1014-02
2006-2291-01
2006-4019-02
2006-4255-01
2006-5038-02
2005-9005-02
2006-9103-03
2006-9107-01
9353-2642-01
9611-1625-07
9612-1616-07
9612-1625-07
9721-0120-13
2006-4021-01
2006-4252-82
2006-4255-01
Part Name ` Qty
Front base plate set Mie» > 1
Circuit base plate-8 set Bis ZARB > | 1
Remote control base plate set DET AMA yb 1
Release operation lever-C set vVIN-—XA REVIA CA. y | 1
Release operation lever A set vy — XB os —Ax y pl
Lens lock lever vVyxzRn eg ¿UI 1
Mirror box light shield plate TSFI-HY 3ER 1
Lock lever spring Or PUE AT) AY 1
Synchro terminal set VIDA IFA:
Self-timer window ENTRTE 1
Tape-A (3.8X8) P= TA 1
Penta. front packing A YARRA Я 1
Release operation lever-C set screw VY—ZXM#L/—Cikx 1
ER
Lens lock axis
Screw-D
L.E.D
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
Ухо y hb
F1 à E XD
L.E.D
HER EAN E
HER ASE AL
FERRAN E
E-ring Е Ух
L.E.D fixed plate a7 КЛИШЕ #
L.E.D tube LEDS a — 7 1
Tape-A F- 74
XG 7 CODE No. 2006-100, -200
XG 2 CODE No. 2006-300, -400
XG-E CODE No. 2006-500, -600
$0 9512-1616-02 (Pas)
2006- 1008-04
, 2006 -4107-01
8 (x2)
¡ 0 2006-0153-02 (P34)
> @ 2006-0527-02 (P33)
2006-2291-01
Part No.
2006-0151-05
2006-0152-01
2006-0153-02
2006-0527-02
2006-1006-03
2006-1008-04
2006-1014-02
2006-2291-01
2006-4019-02
2006-4022-02
2006-4255-01
2006-5038-02
2006-9005-02
2006-9103-03
2006-9107-01
9611-1625-07
9612-1616-02
Part Name
Front base plate set МГ
Circuit base plate-B set OBER Bt
Remote control base plate set Jzsv&aßt>!
Release operation lever-A set vy) — <zükv.’'i—Atry}
Lens lock lever vvZzus vs
Mirror box light shield plate $ F—K eo F7FABHKR
Lock lever spring Oy) UA AT) YS
Synchro terminal set VIII IFA Y |b
Self-timer window ENXTRETE
Self timer indication reflector Tr 7ATrRHR
Tape-A TI A
Penta. front packing 7 AHORA
Release operation lever-C set screwv)—- Xx CESE _
Lens lock axis vyxzuny 7 th
Screw-D Riki XD
Phillips type screw FERHA CH Jn Г
Phillips type screw FERA A+ AC
pa
0% y
10
XG 7 CODE No. 2006-100, -200
ХС 2 CODE No. 2006-300, -400
XG-E CODE No. 2006-500, -600
ES 9721-0150-13
'. 2008-0532-01
9721-0150-13 Ea
9721-0150-13 @>
9792-2050-40 or | =
ee OR Ta
| =>
9721-0150-13
9721-0150-13 D '
2006-0542-01
a
1
=
т 9792-2050-40 ог &
9794- 9721-0150-13
2006-9405-02 & @2006-5042-03 | Pee
NG $ u
9721-0150-13 QD
(6) 2006-5107-81
(8) 5107-81
Use for those of which mirror holder
arm 18 not painted.
!s- ns 7-7 - о kin Tr LO
кемтЪ.
Part No.
2006-0522-03
2006-0523-01
2006-0524-01
2006-0531-03
2006-0532-01
2006-0541-01
2006-0542-01
2006-5042-03
2006-5044-04
2006-5046-01
2006-505 1-03
2006-9405-02
9721-0150-13
9792-2050-40
9793-2140-40
9794-2050-20
2006-5107-81
Part Name
Mirror return lever lock claw set
Preset operation lever set
Mirror return lever set
Preset operation plate set
Preset lever set
Speed increase gear
Fly wheel gear set
Mirror-up spring
Mirror return spring
Lock claw spring
Preset lever spring
Stopper pin bush
E-ring
Washer
Washer
Washer
Mirror arm sheet
10
Qty
27-Rlvs—-aer7Mm 1
toh
7Y > Ежи ЖУК 1
T5-RLrv-i— er, | 1
уж ЖЕ 1
TUE) RUIZ] ESP 1
MEF -АЖУТ 1
TIARA= MEN +9 À 1
3 TITFATV AY 1
T7F—-RLATF YYZ 1
mp» IMA) y Y 1
TU y FUIAZATY AY 1
AIS Л 1
Е ухУх 7
MO > Y - 0-2
MY y» Y + — O-1
MI » Y Зи O-1
T7-T-ıRBEY—
11
XG 7 CODE No. 2006-100, -200
2 - CODE No. 2006-300, -400
2006-5029-01
2006-3113-02 2006-5030-01
©612-1616-07
=
@ 2006-0561-01 (P39 a
a
>
9612-1616-07
@ 2006-51 16-05 (P37)
0721-0080-13
& L_@9704-3858-20 (P37)
0 2006-0521-02 (P37) *
|
@ 2006-5117-04 (P37)
9721-0150-13
2006-5021-01 _
an
|
|
|
Ù
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
i
8
-
#
=
jr
=
@ 2006-5023-02
(P39) 4 9721-0150-13
A)
@ 2006-0503-03 (P29,36)7
CODE No. 2006-500, -600
À 9612-1616-07
2006-5110-01
2006-0562-01
: SS 58) 9612-1616-07
= PO
=
(x2)
_® 9612-1616-07
‘Soe 2006-5111-01
2006-91 7
2006-5118-01
N, РЭВ
q...
2006-5027-0]
= ri |
@ 5033-81
Use for body of which mirror holder pin
gets into mirror support stopper due to
losseness of mirror holder.
i5—mM aA F—-OA vl dod, ira d—
EX DES MIDA he - Ch AK F—
CHMTS,
Part No.
2006-0381-01
2006-0382-03
2006-0383-01
2006-0384-01
2006-0385-01
2006-0386-01
2006-3404-02
2006-3407-06
2006-3409-02
2006-3410-02
2006-3411-04
.2006-3414-03
2006-3415-03
2006-3416-02
2006-9001-01
9612-1416-07
9613-1418-01
9691-2045-07
9691-2055-07
9693-2045-01
9695-2055-07
9721-0120-13
Part Name
Counter ratchet set
Return lever set
Counter operation gear-A set
Winding base plate-B set
Film indication lever axis set
Counter operation lever set
Counter return spring
Counter index
Counter operation lever spring
Counter operation gear-B
Counter operation gear-C
Return lever spring
Winding operation lever-A
29YY4-5FZsth tr}
“ol 4-Y/vVsi—- + se |
PI MBR tr}
EBRARB > |
TA MARTVUA— sr |
77-е -
ty}
Уфу
DYY3I-IER
OY F—RE ev -S—SP
AYY/A-Bh&r—
A E E ds
ED) 24- Yv-—- A772
Уж OVA
Winding operation lever-A spring УЖЕ v-!—- a 7 U v7
Winding operation lever-A screw F 7’ + ROvV-S—j}- HEA
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
Phillips type tapping screw
Phillips type tapping screw
Phillips type tapping screw
Phillips type tapping screw
E-ring
FRA SB RL
TFRKAM HAL
+¥AH 2 2 ey AL
РЕДЬКУ |
. Е УХ
Qty
12
cb y
13
XG 7 CODE No. 2006-100, -200
XG 2 CODE No. 2006-300, -400
XG-E CODE No. 2006-500, -600
—
=
PLE"
e я
.
ñ
fi
|
= Rss — 7
|
—
a
'
GO A
i
1
ja"
|
ade
2006- 3055-02
E 2006- 3053-02
2006-3052-03
= ча
ГРИТ А
Ss SS AA AA Е Е = a
АУ и.
9701-0200-13
a ¡A ann
Pt IN NN
IN М\
IN NF
2006-3041-04
Part No.
2006-0325-13
2006-0338-01
2006-3032-01
2006-3037-02
2006-3041-04
2006-3042-01
2006-3052-03
‚ 2006-3053-02
2006-3055-02
2006-3421-02
2006-9116-81
9691-2040-07
9791-0200-13
Part Name
Spool gear set
Winding base plate-A set
Winding gear
Reversing stop claw spring
Spool
Spool inner barrel
Sprocket shaft
R button release spring
Sprocket gear
Film indication filler
Tapping screw
Phillips type screw
E-ring
ATF—NWHeY—ty À
RE RAE» |
ED AY —
И ЕЛ ХУ
ATM
AT— MP fi
хули
RORRAT I YZ
хех | &r—
FTAHNLRMTÄF—
+EKH 2» E RAL
E YyY
13
Qty
63
14
XG 7 CODE No. 2006-100, -200
XG 2 CODE No. 2006-300, -400
XG-E CODE No. 2006-500, -600
2006-9612-02
9692-2050-07
M 2006-4124-81
| |
a 2006-3027-04
x 2006-9118-81 2006- 3028-02
2006-9402-81 (P49)
|
9691-1728-07
~ vr № 2006-9115-81
|
> | 2019-0326-11 |
№ 2006-3021-05
2006-3057-02 9692-2040-07
2006-9011-03 (P41)
M 2006-9011-81
LAO 2008-2020-01 (Pal)
© @ 2006-9441-01 (P41)
NS: >
2017-3051-02
N
2006-0340-01
(sa): I
et
© 3017-81, (© 9602-2050-07 (use as a set)
(eo b Cit)
Use for those of which gear axis of |
winding axis receiver set (0310) 15 not 2006-3040-0) &
sufficiently tightened. ]
(Not necessary when 0310 15 replaced with
servicing part.)
EMM + > | (0310) O% + — 0 0 Di &
lé ODICIEMT SE, (CL, #— caw Maddie
RALABSAH FB)
Part No. Part Name
UA
2019-0310-11 Winding axis receiver set
2019-0326-11 S4 contact 54 %Н
2006-0340-01 Winding operation plate set ЖЖ Е Жо $
2006-0350-01 Shutter charge gear-D set — V+r»ysk%Fr-—YVxXY-DA Y bh
2019-0360-11 Charge operation plate set #*v—2##F# + |b
2006-3009-01 Return spring ELXAT7VUYv7
2006-3012-01 Winding stop lever EL DU
2006-3020-01 Reset lever Y ey HUA
2006-3021-05
2006-3027-04
2006-3028-02
2006-3029-02
2006-3040-01
2017-3051-02
2006-3056-01
2006-3057-02
2006-9011-03
2006-9011-81
2006-9012-02
2006-9108-03
2006-9115-81
2006-9441-01
2006-9118-81
2006-9124-81
9691-1728-07
9692-2040-07
9692-2050-07
9793-2038-50
2006-1066-01
2006-3017-81
2006-9402-81
9692-2050-07
Reset lever spring
S4 spring
54 change lever
S4 lug plate
Winding claw spring
Sprocket
R button lock spring
Sprocket receiver
Winding stop lever axis
S4 change lever
Charge plate pressure
Tapping screw
Winding stop lever base
Tapping screw
Tapping screw
Y Es RUAATY) AY
S4 4
54 Di vV—
S457
ENMATY YF
AFaryryzy ph
В guy 22
AVFuayy hws
% ik bv eS — i
54 JR L' 5 —
Fr —7BRPALXA
ELDUA—E
Phillips type tapping screw TFrH2 > ErnLl
Phillips type tapping screw Алу кун |5
Phillips type tapping screw Алу кын |"
Washer
Light shield plate
MO » Y + —
BH
Shutter charge gear-C axis holder Y + 7 A—* y — Y
Collar
DAYS—-f{LERO KAR
Phillips type tapping screw +t¥NtHt Zoe vnAL
+ Y
CAPA
ЕЯ
15
XG 7 CODE No. 2006-100, -200
XG 2 CODE No. 2006-300, -400
XG-E CODE No. 2006-500, -600
@ 2006-3309-04
(P42)
2006-3308-02
>
@ 2006-3312-02 ( ©
(P42)
Y iS 2006-3304-02 (P21)
6682: 17140:08
M 2006-9117-81
9691-2050-07 8
X 961 1-2060-07
9612-2065-01
|
Sl |
@2006-9102-03 (pas) |
M 2006-9102-82
2006-1111-02
2006- 1041-01
(x?)
2006-9400-01
2006-1112-01
@2006-1012-02 (Pas)
|
ep 0031-1027-02
0031-1034-03
2006- 1020-01
NE
@2007-1105-03 CR
naa |
(x2) Po
@ 2006-9121-03 ES
№ 2006-9012 1-82
>
=?
E 2006-1020-01
|
Fhe 2000-1012-02 (P44)
MN
Part No.
2006-1012-02
2006-1020-01
0031-1027-02
0031-1034-03
2006-1041-01
2006-1042-01
2006-1043-01
2007-1105-03
2006-1110-05
2006-1111-02
2006-1112-01
2006- 3304-02
2006-3308-02
2006-3309-04
2006-3312-02
2006-9102-03
2006-9102-82
2006-9121-03
2006-9121-82
2006-9409-01
2006-9117-81
9612-2065-01
9691-2050-07
9691-2060-07
9692-1740-02
2006-1077-81
2006-9120-82
Strap
Strap
Strap
Strap
Light
Light
Light
Part Name
hanger
hanger
hanger
hanger
shield
shield
shield
seat
ring
ring stopper
packing-A
packing-B
packing-C
Hinge
Back cover lock lever
Lock cover
Back cover lock spring
Rewinding fork
Rewinding friction spring
Rewinding axis receiver
Light shield collar
Film guide screw
Film guide screw
Tapping screw
Tapping screw
Back cover lock guide
Tapping screw
Phillips type screw
Phillips type tapping screw
Phillips type tapping screw
Phillips type tapping screw
Collar
Sub axis
mA
М RBS
=i hi ®
Е# УХ
LA > + A
EX 7 +7B
EX > + YC
E y ? |
‚+ Л
DT Ро
REÑOD>2x7) >
ERLT7A-2
Qty
1
1
ЕЖУ 2 УнУухтуух 1
= RLM
же ЦЕ 7 7 —
TANLAFEÉZX
RAL
EROU>2 JAP
ЕАН ЛЮ |
+ERKR HAZY EYRE
TERHA» EYAL
KRAMNRA À 7 —
KF—-AKARACE
0-3
1}
16
XG 7 CODE No. 2006-100, -200
XG 2 CODE Ne. 2006-300, -400
XG-E CODE No. 2006-500, -600
@ 2006-0272-02 (P44)
is - ve
AR EI 9612-1675-07
E 3 M0612-1775-02
| D À 2006-2015-02
=
SOS 2006-2016-02
1 | 2006-2017-02
See Page 17
16
Part No. Part Name | Oty
2006-0271-03 AM change holder set AM WRKA SF — > | 1
2006-0272-02 Dial axis set FAT REZ | l
(2006-2012-04) AM change spring MUuMzT7Uv?7 1
2006-0273-02 ASA brush holder set ASA TURN — +9 k 1
2006-0274-02 ASA resistor set ER Е ША > № 1
2006-0276-01 Shutter speed dial base plate set + 74-41 YABB» pl
2006-2008-03 Shutter speed dial pressure Vr a —#4 rımı 1
2006- 2009-02 Cam plate 2214 | 1
2006-2015-02 Click spring I) 2 1
2006-2016-02 Auto lock plate t—heo 7H 1
2006-2017-02 Auto lock spring Же 1
2006-4253-01 Tape-B 7-7 B 1
2005-4270-01 Jump lead (6 0.4 §=3mm) EA 3
2006-9105-02 Auto lock plate guide F—_+Fa0>2¿BNHA F 1
9612-1675-07 Phillips type screw А вела | 1
9612-1775-07 Phillips type screw 0-1
17
XG 7 CODE No. 2006-100, -200
XG 2 CODE No. 2006-300, -400
XG-E CODE No. 2006-500, -600
Assy. Part No.
2006-0402-03
HB orl ¿4
For the record of modifications of Flexible circuit base plate set, refer to P.45-48. A9
FVEYINMERtCy FOREREBIP.4A5~4E SMELT Ih,
peer see eee AAA 55 DE
a
9
=
И» (Red
En (Blue) 3029
= XG 7 (2006-100, -20:
Baltery cave base plate $. tug piste XG 2 (2006-300, -40:
Li
a) XG-E (2006-500, -60
Sint twitch
(Shutter block) 5, Contact
N И done
tas (Green 0580 2791 Shutter magnel
(Black) Release magnet 2191 a =
Y (Brom) A fi Suiten mag LED i’ BEE
1 tapes
у pio | | р | LEO
\ y N
“2; lve (Bloch) 22104 | Ц 4 ’ | »
| | „_ 2019-0580 Res magnet _ 2 à, °
ag a tna ee N
# 3! H = ` ı 2766 a
= | 2166 ( ) Trage contact “TT
I (Grown) | Verger contact Sa | ©
3 = т 1 or |
Е: 2 <-------------------- J 0064” O -
E o Тези" bate plola | i
"A.
“i= г, (Biscu) MA N
ty (Purple) | fy (Purple)
f Mm (Red) ' fu (Red
ri ен (Brown) (y (Brown)
\ Z fy (Orange) fis (Orange)
e ea
E, (Brown!
am & E, (Yellow)
y Cırcwl bass plate À м
Ky ft, (Bh 0274
Il с, У,
vA,
(= Ñ \
г
0596 CaS сисый base plate
E, (hse) № 7 ¡hor bisch model!
С, 4 ==... - =... ==... =
is (While) |
ty (Green ; |
\ * 7 fi (Blechi-- Black model only : -
'
| Е]!
CdS смо | 5
baie plate a ae = | =>
‚ 9,9 E i 5
0595 = | i
À 2
Е? | |
| 1
1 |
| 1
Е a a À
Assy Part No. 2006-0402-03 Assy Part Name Flexible circuit base plate set
7vVeY TAB БЕ
Symbol Part No. Com Part Name Type. Qty
1C1 | 2006- 4301-01 | MS 1865
IC2 | 2006-4302-03 тс | MS 1856 4
1C3 | 2006- 4303-03 | MS 1867 1
1C4 | 2006-4304-07 HIC
D1(0) | 9361-5631-01 | | Diode KB 162 1
Ql(Tr) | 9363-1032-01/%4P | Transistor 2541162 1
R3 | 9431-1037-31 1/ 16m 10K)
RS | 9422-1046-32 „ion 100K 11 1
RG | 9431-3047-31 1/160 300 0 |1
AR | 9422-6806-32 Fixed resistor 1/8 680 :
| 9422-3916-32 _1/8w 39001 |
| 9422-8216-32 _1/8w 6207
Ra | 9422-1826-32 _1/8w 1.8x0 |1
E _9422-3326-32| ___| _____-_-___ | 1/8 8 KO |
rca 124 | 2006-8408-01] ___| Lead wire_ Pink__ 160.08/7 wries Е 35 _
RQ | 9422-301 _1/8w 300 N
R10 | 9422-2416-62 Fixed resistor 1/60 2400 2
VR1 | 9472-2049-38 __VGO62K _ 200K D 1
VR3 VR2 | 9472-1539-38 __VGO62K 15K D 2
vra | 9472-1520-38] | Variable resistor Tone sx |1
C1 | 9535-1555-36 | 1. Saf /35V ]
С? | 9535-6845-31 | O.684F/35V
СЗ | 9563-4738-31 0.047 4F/1.2V 1
С4 | 9531-2265-31 22#/3.15V 1
C5 | 9531-4765-31 Condenser 47 4/3. 15V 1
co | 9531-1575-61 1504 /3.15V 1
9534-1555-33 | or 1.54 /25V
cr | 9534-1555-63 | or 1.5 ME /20V 1
9535-1555-31 _1.54F/35V
ca | 9531-3365-31 33aF/3.15V 1
#5 | 2006-8403-01 ... Blue 60.08/7 wiresi=27mm ]
134 | 2006-8403-01 Lead mire qe 60.08/7 wires#=200 1
2006-4260-01 a clon tape-A t=0.1 15x4,5mm 1
№ The R4 is excluded on the Flexible circuit base plate set
Ш 54910403 (7 væ+r tr) KKRTINBHA,
9422-2036-39 1/6w 20K пт
| 9422-2236-39 Ve" eK
_9422-2436-39 LEW 2x0 _
9422-2736-39 1/8ы 27к п
422- = |/6w 20K 0
R4 | 9422-3336-39 Fixed resistor 1/8w 33x 0 2
| 9422-3936-39 (for adjustment) 1/8w 39x N
9422-4736-39 L/w 47x 0
9422-5636-39 1/60 56k 0
9422-6836-39 1/8w sax 0
9422-1046-39 1/8 100K п
9422-2046-39 1/ow 200K 0) L
жа
ЖЗ
№ 4
№ 5
%7
When HIC (2006-4304-02) with no lead wire f 34 is replaced with a type after
=03, the soldering position of (34 should be different. (Refer to P.46 - 48.)
Since the shutter block is grounded to © of power supply, X earth plate (2204)
and lead wire L 20 are not needed and have discontinued. (Allowable to
remove.)
New type of 2019-0580 has been modified so that it can be grounded to Ejuf
power supply from magnet base plate. So, earth wire (Black) has been
discontinued.
Shutter block is grounded to (E) power supply the same as in *2 „ So, #14
is mot needed and has been discontinued. (Allowable to remove.)
For bodies of which (inclined) indication cannot be adjusted by RB, lead
wire (124) is used instead of RB.
In bodies at the initial stage of massproduction, the positions of 22 and
#19-2 are opposite to those in this wiring diagram. (If AM switch is
in normal conditions, there is no problem of positions.)
In the case of Black body, the top cover connot be gounded to © of power
supply. Therefore, CdS circuit base plate (2006-0596) with earth contact
and lead wire (23 are required. (For discontinuance of contact, refer to P.25)
—FRIMOMH ATLAS 4 yous (2006—4304—02) + —03NHO FI FM
FABRA 13491 MARRAS HADAS], (Р.46—48& т)
ИУ 3 2HMRET-2xTN TER Pb, XT—2 (220% AU Y — FM E20
НЕЕ ЕАО, (MALTA Lu)
2019— 05800 H 14 7, #73» bh GMD OCHRMHICT-—ATASIOKRWAANT
№ ТОС, T—-2:M (в) ниезатиз +,
“2A Y rs IA 7 2 )ШИКТ-Х&ПТИБАЮ, НЖИСАтЕвМЕ
“hthi3T,
Am (MS) METRCMBLEHAN KF —it, ВОК у — FR (124) afm
¿ihtni3,
BREXYO*XF—H122 1192019372 ORNBADIAHAICA sthit,. (AM SW, pt
Е ТЯННЕНШЯХ b à #4)
TI IRF NA dia COTA MTRANAD TAM à OCdsRE (2006—
0596) ¿EY—FRILZADETA, (IYAThHEITALTSBAH, P.254m)
$
19
2006- 1352-31 SD
<> ¿008 - 1344-21
(xe)
@ 2006- 1322-32 e
(P21)
2006-0376-11
@ 2006-1324-32
Pa 35 @ 2006-0184-12
S_ LL |
KG
XG 7 CODE No. 2006-200
XG 2 CODE No. 2006-400
XG-E CODE No. 2006-600
Y
GE *
o E
#
9 @0791-1625-43 (P21)
(x4)
2006-01 80-12
2006-0183 12 | (P22,23)
2006 -O417-)1
9693-1740-06
№ ® 2006-1322-32 (P21)
Lead wires list
Symbol Part No. Color Typ. Qty.
£1] 2006-8401-01 Yellow 60.08/7 wires =70 l
#2| 2006-8402-01 Brown 60.08/7 wires #=70 1
#3| 2006-8403-01 Blue 60.08/7 wires Y =45 1
#4] 2006-8404-01 Orange 60.08/7 wires £=40 1
£5] 2006-8403-01 Blue 60.08/7 wires 1-27 1
#6] 2006-8406-01 Grey 60.08/7 wires #=110 1
#7! 2006-8403-01 Blue 60.08/7 wires #=118 1
48] 2006-8408-01 Pink 60.08/7 wires £=75 1
19| 2006-8409-01 White _60.08/7 wires # =85 1
g 10] 2006-8401-01 Yellow 60.08/7 wires # =95 1
#11] 2006-8411-01 Red 60.08/7 wires £=110 1
#12| 2006-8402-01 Brown 60.08/7 wires 4 =100 1
# 13| 2006-8413-01 Ригр1е 60.08/7 wires —#=100 1
#16] 2006-8404-01 Orange 60.08/7 wires #=115 1
£17] 2006-8417-01 Green 60.08/7 wires # =144 1
# 18| 2006-8411-01 Вед 60.08/7 wires i= 1
#19-2 #19-1] 2006-8417-01 Green 60.08/7 wires # =65 2
@ 21] 2006-8409-01 |. White 60.08/7 wires # = 1
#22] 2006-8417-01 Green 60.08/7 wires T=50 I
1 231 2006-8414-01 Black 60.08/7 wires # =30 1
1 32| 2006-8411-01 Red 60.08/7 wires # =150 1
£ 33| 2006-8403-01 Blue 60.08/7 wires _# =150 1
1 34| 2006-8403-01 Blue 60.08/7 wires # =20 1
# 14| 2006-8414-01 Black 60.08/7 wires £ =105 1
A 20| 2006-8414-01 Black 60.08/7 wires # =65 1
Above lead wires are supplied per meter
bic) —-FRORBK In MTE¿LITF.
19
Part No. Part Name : o. Qty
2006-0180-12 Top cover set for XG7 В 7AE + | - 1
2006-0183-12 Top cover set for XG2 XG 2H. P 1
2006-0184-12 Top cover set for XG-E XG-E НЕ фут 1.
2006-0291-11 Shutter speed dial/Function selector Y yr y» 4 — 4 4 Le y bl
2006-0376-11 Winding lever set EVE th | | 1
2006-0417-11 Bottom cover set Fire bp 1
2006-1314-31 Washer ЕЖУ oY + = 1
2006-1322-32 Screw-A BRIEDEUXA - 2
2006-1324-32 Screw-B Sikh Ye AB 2
2006-1344-31 Winding lever pressure H% byes — fps 1
2006-1346-32 Rewinding knob *EL/7 1
2006-1352-31 Accessory shoe spring TIETY—-Y a SX 1
9693-1740-06 Phillips type tapping screw +АНЯУ КУН 2
9791-1625-43 Washer M7 > + — 4
20
The details of modifications of parts provided with @ or @ in pages 1 through 19 are explained in the following.
1.
2.
3. When there are relative parts to be modified, the part cannot be individually modified to other type. The relative
4.
They are classified into Types A~B or Types A~D according to the frequency of modifications, and the differen-
ces are mentioned in tables.
The parts are interchangeable with other types only when they come in a set with the relative parts of each type.
parts must also be modified to make set part.
For parts of previous type which cannot be supplied, (X) is attached to the tail of the part number in the table.
If it is necessary to modify the (X)-marked part, replace it with other type.
WFO УР. 1—IBT@H, ХФ SHSORBARSIOUTHRL THN ET.
|
2.
3.
4.
la
2.
0) 2] 1- &E>TType А-В, XliType A-DN L 3191, & 74 ТОЖЕ ROEXTCTEMLDLIOET,
FONBAMNANERE CE <, Митино b SMS ROBO CMA ERTL TER,
MAXI ЖЕ, FOMRMATIINGA FA TILXMT A Et A, MOFA УСТ 545, MET
ty bh CRMLTFEW, |
974 7 CAE T à ZT II, Faden: (x) мнт. (x) POSEATIAD YE
OEE RL FA TIDAL TPS.
Shutter release button / Y + y 2—#
e Do not use Type A for bodies with Type B attached. (It may cause shortcircuit.)
e Type ВР} ИТ T7 —-I (Type Ad AL ZU IE (7a - Hr 3 HB),
Type A Type B
2006-0281 -02 2006-0281 -81
© ©
ie
nsulation tube
Г 2 7
Self-timer indication / tJL 7 HEM
Type A Type B
2006-1017-01 (x) 2006-1017-04
Cut off the boss to change it into Type A.
ЖАИИИЮИ Туре Al: 24
ee SS JP pan F4
Ss EE
BE u au nz. nz Dunn u nn D nn u nn ln
2006-0281 Shutter release button set 2 +4 9—-@Mtyb
2006-1017 Self-timer indication plate +ı 7am
q)
3. Rewinding knob / HE LJ 7
e Only 2006-3304-8$ can be individually used for Туре А.
© 2006- 3304-94 0 M8 CT ype Al НЕТ.
Type A Type B
2006-3301-02 (x) 2006-3301-04
2006-1346-31 (X)-----Black type 2006-1346-32 «Black type
| 3.400 y”
2.5 ва A |
E]
—_— aaa
2006- 3303-02 2006-3303-03
2.6. 3.500
Le
2006-3304-01 (x)
7 \ u \
2006-3311-01 2006-3311 -03
&
4. Screw (for black type only) / FILE X(75 y 241 TUR)
Type A Type B
2006-1322-31 2006-1322-32
2006-1324-31 (x) 2006-1324-32
2006-1324-81 =
9791-1625-43 (Washer!
Not used.
GE MI L ous
2006- 1346 |
2006-3301 !
Rewinding knob BK 47
2006- 3303 Rewinding handle spring Filz Fini
2006- 3304 Winding lever friction
A bkLri-71 7237
2006-3311 Rewinding knob screw IL /УЕХ
2006- 1322 Screw-A TERIRmL AA
2006-1324 Screw-B ТРУ AB
22
5. Top cover set, CdS Р.С. board / EA/M—ty К, CASE
e Туре D is not used for the products, but is supplied as servicing part. When replacing Types A~C with Type
D, refer to P. 25.
e For the modification of each part of contacts, refer to Р. 23—24.
e Туре DitMasliis(#RenTowEtAA, +- КАНЕ СС ЖВСЕТ. Type A—CE Type 01:7 SMSIIP.
25% BHALT Fatr
61-977 }MAROBEANSILP.3~P.2¢ SM TFS,
‘Type A
Type B
2006-0130-01 (X)
2006-0133-01 (X)
2006-0134-01 (X)
2006-0130-02 (X)
2006-0133-02 (X)
2006-0134-02 (X)
Type C
Type C (Black)
2006-0130-03
2006-0133-03
2006-0134-03
2006-0180-12
2006-0183-12
2006-0184-12
2006-0596-01
Type D Type D (Black)
2006-0130-03 2006-0180-12
2006-0133-03 2006-0183-12
2006-0134-03 2006-0184-12
2006-0596-02 2006-0596-02
6. Contact (continued to next page) / 1747 REA (ASH)
e Types A~D stand for Types A~D of top cover set mentioned in the previous section.
® Туре А-П: Л [3 — ty KOT ype A-Di aL TOET.
Type A Type В. С Туре О
2006-0132-01 2006-0132-02 2006-0132-03
2006-42 16-02 is set. e 2006-9246-02 is set. e2013-9246-01 is set.
@°(MM-9246-02 4 ‚Гай гл e 2006-9246-024°+ ,F RN TUS ®©2013-9246-014't , KaNTIYWA
2006-9246-02 2013-9246-01
Type A is used.
Туре A& fli
2006-0130 (0180) Top cover set for XG 7 XG 7Mk»+:=+-P
2006-0133 (0183) Top cover set for XG 2 XG 2Hk9»+*:-+€ +
2006-0134 (0184) Top cover set for XG-E XG-Elikrri-+ ,+
as] Cd5 circuit bose plote set CdSilhit ; |
2006-0132 Accessory shoe bose sel 7 7+4#1)—: .1.—Mit-+ |}
2006-9246 bi
2013-9246 Contact-B 2:77 i8viB
23
85 a
Type A Type B, C Type D
2006-1054-02 2006-1054-03
Types B and C are used.
Туре В, С& {Я
Thickness : 1. 2am
MA : 1.2
2006-1061-0/
Types B and C are used.
Type В, СН
2006-1062-01 2006-1062-02
e Sir
Types B and C are used.
Туре В, С
= LA
2006-1068-01 2013-1068-01
Not used.
‘EARL % La
Not used. Types B and C are used.
EL Zu - Туре В, СН
2006-9245-03 2006-9245-04
Types B and C are used.
sl Gum Туре В, CF
po :
9798-3155-87 (Washer)
Not used. Types B and C are used.
ff HL Zw Туре В, СЯ
2006-1338-01 (Black only)
Not used, Not used.
FIL Ze (EL Su
2006- 1054 Accessory shoe set plate 77+t#11-22-mit#k
2006- 1061 Contact-D 2-77 HiEriD
2006- 1062 Contact operation pin 2777 FRR AME >
a Contact-E 2597 Е№НЕ
2006-1069 Contact isolation sheet 2+ 977 | hte — |}
2006-1338 Contact eorth plate 27977 ЕЕТ-АЯ
25
iContact improving procedure / 274327 HEHUCARA
When replacing the top cover set Types A~C of P. 22 with Type D (or replacing only the relative parts of
contact with Type D), it is necessary to modify the way of finishing (replacing) or CdS P.C. board set mentioned
below and the lead wiring method.
P.220) Type A~CO Eh/i—+ К & Type Dar 588 (Rliaznv # 7 MERMA DO A E Type DI: XML MA)
IZED FIR CASBRt y FOMI (REM) RU — РЮО BI-20ET,
1. Drill the fastening pins of CdS P.C. board set and remove the contact. Also, cut off the part above the
dotted line by nippers. (It is also allowable to replace it to Type D (2006-0596-02) ).
Са о FORME ZI FULL EM T2 #7 HIS EMH, MIT SRB EN Ш.“ TODOS (Rit
Туре D (2006-0596-02) 1: RL TEL).
Contact
1317 FRE
O Fastening pins O
MIE
2. Replace the lead wire fa (white) and (2: (green) with those 25—30 mm longer.
e In the case of black body, replace f 2; (black) with a longer one as well.
I— К (Г), Ра ($) +41 1125—30mmb200 4,012 МТ,
07737 EFD Ti. (FH) БИОСе
3. Connect each lead wire.
A- KER eA 5.
M Wiring for silver body / /Jb/‘\—*K>— Reese
Ba (8) cr de
£;: (E green
M Wiring for black body / 77 y 24 7— HE
в“
в» (В) мне]
2»; (№) green)
En (RR) (black:
26
7. AM change holder / AMYIIRSW. KIVA —
@4221 and 4222 of Type C are parts for servicing only.
e Regarding bodies using Type A, those with defective AM change holder must be replaced with Type В or С.
® Type C4221, 42221#— VAN TT,
o Type AMO AF TAM SW. DRM EN tl Type В, RIZCIRMLT FEV.
Type A
Type B
Type C
2006-0271-01 (X)
2006-0271-03
2006-0271-02 (X) or
(The above
is -02.)
(Fd (2-02)
2006-0271-03
2006-2012-01 (X) or
2006-2012-02 (X)
2006-2012-04
Either Type A or B can be used.
Type A, XIIBO ES ВЕТВЬ
2006-4221-81
Not used. Not used. NS
@AL ee Al ee &
2006 -4222-B1
3
Not used. Not used. у
(FIL Zu (PHIL Zu
9612-1628-07 (Screw)
(For shutter dial base plate.)
Type A is used.
9612-1635-07 (Screw)
(For shutter dial base plate. )
[> 1774 TART) Type A+ (EH (rr 1 9— SA Y IBARRA)
Length : 2. 8mm Length : 3. бам
&& : 2.8mm Ez : 3, бит
M Type С mounting diagram
Штуре CRB
a
2006-0271
2006-2012
2006- 4221
2006-4222
0271-03
4221-81
4222-81
9612-1635-07
Completely fit the closed end of
4221 hook onto the boss, and
apply adhesive (© Bond G-17).
42217 y ВОТ УМЕ
KAOMAETAR, MM (A
~KG-17) €@6T 5. -
AM change holder set
AM change spring AMUMAT > 7
SW. 8 sub spring SW. BMMATI > 7
Spring hanger SW. 8 ММА’! > 7 HHT
АМ мо
8. Penta holder 1 (related to eyepiece modification)
NTIRIMA—1 HRY > AERO)
e Note that 2006-5004 and 0504 are also related with parts other than those mentioned on this page. (Refer to P.
28~ 30.)
e 2006-5004, 05043 20<—THIADERDEOMEDIANEFOTIÍELT F A, (P.28~P.308 MA)
Type A Туре В, B’ Туре С
2006-0881-01 (Х)
2006-0881-02 2006-0881-05
0881-01. 0881-02
2006-5004-03
2006-5004-04 (B) or 2006-0504 -01
2006-5004-05 (B’)
I
Not used.
El.
2006-5006-01 2006-5006-02
17 .бва
17.900 7
ja
Fa
AO
2006-5008-02 (X)
2006-5008 -03
Type B, B’ is used.
q y Type В, В’ & №1}
т Тб >
Туре В can be used,
2006- 0881 Eye-piece lens set /4@Wi- At , |
2006-0504 Penta. holder set МУЖУ sb
2006- 5004 Penta. holder “+ 94 ¥-
2006- 5006 Eye-piece lens light shield frame Е > «Arch
2006-5008 Eye-piece lens pressure Jdellı > Xi
27
54
9. Penta holder 2 (related with fresnel modification)
ATAIARIMA—2 (MAREE OB)
e Note that 2006-5004 and 0504 are related with parts other than those mentioned on this page. (Refer to P.27 and
30.)
e 2006-0503 is also related with other parts.
(Refer to P. 36.)
e 2006-5004, 05044 20<—TLIADNDEREOMEVLIANEFOTIELTEFA4w. (P.27, P.3108 MM)
e 2006-0503 BÚNMBDAENOMENDI ET. (P.368M)
Type Á, B, B'
Type C
2006-5004-03 or
2006-5004-04 or
2006-5004-05
2006-0504-0]
Addition
2006-5805-04
2006-5805-06
2006-0509-01
2006-5011-01
2006-5011-02
2006 -5007-02
2006-5007-04
2006 -5013-02
S 13.90
—
2006-5013-03
=i
Continued to
next page.
RA— DIREC
GS
Type A,
B, B’
Type C
2006-5005-01
e Type C can be used.
Type CfhllH al fe
2006-5005-04
2006-0503-01 or
2006 -0503-02
2006-0503-03
2006-5003-01
Not used.
НЗ
2006-5010-01
NK
Not used.
MIL eu
Continued to
next page.
RS = DACRE
2006-0504
2006- 5004
2006- 5003
2006- 5005
2006- 5007
2006-5009
2006-5010
2006-5011
2006-5013
2006-5032
2006-5805
Pento. holder
Pento. holder
Pento. holder
Penta. receiver
Scale plate
Fresnel lens
Fresnel lens
Fresnel lens
Fresnel lens
Packing-B
Fresnel lens
sel NY FEN IT , À
AFAN
shield plate str
“a, ЖИ
Ink Phe
holder ‘keith —
frame HIFI
pressure spring MNBA ATI SY 7
holder spring Mind - A707
Е LB
НМ
29
A y
30
Type A, B, B’ Type C
2006-5037-01
Not used.
fe M L & L
2006-5024-01
Not used.
ff BL ua
2006-5031-01
Not used.
(‘ALL Ste
10. Penta holder 3 (related with penta. pressure modification)
NTIARIMA—3 (мял)
e Note that 2006-5004 and 0504 are related with parts other than those mentioned on this page. (Refer to Р. 27—
29.1
e 2006-5004, 050414 2 MX — У вв COMEDIA E FO TEL RSL. (P.27—P.2988 MR)
Туре А. В Туре В’, С
2006-5004-03 ог 2006-5004-05 ог
2006-5004-04 2006-0504-01
Diameter: 2. | ва : 1.800
Fr A: 2.1 ва : 1.80m
9693-2040-07 (Screw! 9693-1740-07 (Screw)
(For 5014 fitting. | (For 5014 fitting.)
(5014821 H3) (501458 {+ FA)
Screw diameter : 2 mm Screw diameter : |. 7mm
DURE: 2 ВСЕЙ : 17m
2006-0504 Penta. holder set “+ 7 F—+ yb
2006- 5004 Penta, holder Ft
2006-5014 Penta. pressure (Left side) “> 7 PLM (A)
2006-5024 Packing-C FAME UKE YC
2006-5031 Packing-A Fit - TELA
2006-5037
Finder packing 77 1 - %—FRMK: Ar
11. Battery case base plate 1 (For Type C, refer to next page.)
With — ABM (Type CRAN- SM)
Type A Туре В. В’. С
2006-0420-01 (X) 2006-0420-02 (X) or
2006-0420-03
о Чо © © © )/
O. es 2 | оо” _
a “e = a |
9613-1640-01 (Screw x 3) 9611-1640-02 (Screw x 3)
SS) (For 0420 fitting.) ES) (For 0420 fitting)
=
(0420 №1418) (0420 BfIA)
A
12. Battery case base plate 2/ MY —A5Í% 2
Type A, B Type B’. C
2006-0420-02 (x) 2006-0420-02 (X) or
2006-0420-03
12006-5036-03:
Not used.
(EH CL eu
A A AA AA A PAR nn en
2006-0420 Battery cose base plate set With - ХТ от
2006-5036 Light shield sponge AE LE
32
13. Battery case base plate 3 (For Types А. В, and В’, refer to P. 31)
Bib7—AGM3 (Type А, BB UEDUTRP.MÉBMLT FA)
Type A, B, B’ Type C
2006-0420-01 (X) 2006-0420-03
2006-0420-02 (X)
(2006-4218-01)
Not used.
(PARAL Zw
—
14. Release magnet/L U—-ZAV7RY bh
e Pav attention to the combination with the release operation levers on next page according to the type of
release magnet (with and without pin. |
e [п Type D. earth wire (black) is discontinued, but in Types A~C, be sure to make the wiring of black lead.
ед HM (COTM) CEN, KA DL N)- XML /— ОЕ TFS,
e Туре Dt A ON) ARB GOMER TO ESA, Туре AC TAN) — FROR ME TOT Fat
Type A Type B Type C Type D
2006-0580-04 2006-0580-05 2019-0580-11 2006-0580-11
2006-0420 Battery case bose plate set @ity+—-AGhit yb
2006-0580
2019-0580 MG 2 set MG ++
2006-4216 Plus side contact Æitbtr-218H 75 Am
2006-4218 Contact pressure Я) - АНХ
AA
15. Release operation lever / LJ)-REEL/\—
Type A Type B Type C
2006-0571 -01 2006-0527-01 (X) 2006-0527 -02
2006-0585-01
9721-0120-13 (E ring)
&
Ш Combination of release operation lever and release magnet (arrowmarked combinations must
be used).
BlLY-AMRLN-ELY-XAVI Ry FOME pte (ХОР THAD C)
2019-0580-11 2006-0527-01
2006-0580-04 2006-0571 -01
2006-0580-05
2006-0527 -02
AR se
2006-0527 Release operation lever-A set L'- XL “At. +
2006-0571 Release operation lever-C set L'- All Ct 7b
2006-0585 Release operation lever-A set L'!- XML: At yb
45
33
34
16. Remote control base plate / Ut 27%%
Type A Type B
9692-1740-07 (Screw) 2006-0153-02
у
20067433801
| 2006-4241-01 —
-2006-4227-02 —
TA AAA O, A |
2006 - 4230-01
e According to the type of front base plate,
2006-4255 shown below must be used.
e ATOME E > TS Pb ART 2006-4255 +
`2006-0154-01 | MATE
e When Type B is combined with front base plate of which the arrow-marked part number begins with 1~5, 2006-
4255 1$ required.
e PIKE IO FA 1 — 5 ONE Type Be HG ht 319 11 2006-4255 M RECT,
<> 2006- 4255-01
|
2006-0153
2006-0154
2006-4227 Remote control contact-B ‘}+3:18KB
2006-4228 Remote control contact-C 1+2218HC
2006-4230 Contact isolation plate- A ‘+3 > fer @ieHA
2006-4241 Contact isolation plate Чо
2006-4255 Tope-A +-7A
Remote control base plate set J€2>tht $
A
17. Front base plate / Mi #
Type A
Type B
Type C
2006-0151 -01
2006-0151 -02
Screw hole is discontinued.
2006-0151-05
4022 tightning is discontinued.
SAME 4022 ВИНЕ
O L_]
Gall Y
En) |
+ PRM
a A
р
Screw hole is discontinued
2006-4252-81
9612-1616-07 (Screw) m
]
(Can be change to type В.) sé Same as Type B.
(Type Bi: ZW ef fe) QQ OH “ N Type BEhil &
2006-4021-01 | |
(Tightened to (1151. ı
(0151: МНЕ:
¡Tightened to 0151.)
(0151.= DIE
2006- 4022-02
9612-1616-07 (Screw x 3)
Same as type A.
Туре АМ!
9612-1616-07 (Screw x 1)
r
ee
ee
35
A ee
2006-0151 Front base plate set ailtet + |
2006-4021 L.E.D. fixed plate +17 ЛЕТИ
2006-4022 Self timer indication reflector +17 AKG
2006-4252 L.E.D. tube LEDMit+ 1 — 7
36
18. Mirror box/237—-*# 72
Type A Type B Type C
2006-0503-01 2006-0503-02 2006-0503-03
Y
a Lom] '
“x a=)
| =
+
“1!
= С]
Projection 1.6en screw hole
RE 1.632 ZA
2006-501 9-0] 2006-5019-02
Type B is used.
Туре B* (4H
iameter : 1.7
FE: 1.70
9611-1616-12 (Screw x 2)
Not used, Type B is used.
(For 5019 fitting.)
RAL ZY oe Type BE ER}
Parts related with fresnel lens modification (Type А, В. ог В” on P. 28—30) Type C parts on P. 28—30 must be
must be used. used.
StS SOM as (P.28—P.30) Type A. В, XiiB’EArT3I:. Р.28—Р.309 Туре СТС.
19. Mirror return lever lock claw set/ 35-—HELL/ií-0 y 9 ty bk
@ When replacing 2006-0522. select the part from the table below according to the type of shutter unit.
(Refer to the XG series shutter parts list.)
e 2006-0522 2 83 > + 19-122 y +09 4 7 (XGRi + 19" YI A RER) 1-59, FRIEOMAT St,
Type A Type B Type C Type D
2006-0522-01 2006-0522-02 (x) 2006-0522-02 (X) 2006-0522-03
For 1. 2, and 2” type shutters For 3, 3° and 4 type shutters
l 2, 2 Wea F— 3, 3,4 Yor5—H
2006-0503 Mirror box sel i 7-H se 7 A444
2006-0522 Mirror return lever lock claw set 3?5-MELL-+i-D 1 29M y $
2006-5019 Mirror box apron i 37-#» 742707
20. Mirror holder / $ 7—*AILA—
37
Type A
Туре А’
Туре В
2006-0558-01
2006-0558-02
9721 -0080-13 (E-ring)
2006-5116-02
Projection =
RE
Thickness : 0.6mm
HA: 0.600
2006-5116-03
Thickness : 0.6ma
MA : 06m
2006-5116-04
Thickness : 0.600
MA : 0.600
Thickness : O.dm
HA: 0.4en
9791-2140-50 (Washer 0, lmm) or
9792-2140-40 (Washer (,2mm) or
9793-2140-20 (Washer 0. 3mm) .
e Choose one of these so that 5116 looseness is minimized.
6511600 4 7 A feeds:
og A ae BY
9792-2140-40
(Washer 0. 2mm)
9794-3858-20
(Washer 0. 4mm)
2006-0521-01
Type A is used,
Туре A * ff]
Type A is used.
Type АЯ [БИ
2006-0521-02
2006-5117-02
2006-5117-04
Туре А” is used.
Туре A’ #ffif
Type A’ is used.
Туре А’ & [ЕН]
A A AA г
2006-0521
2006-0558
2006-5116
2006-5117
Mirror operation lever sel
Mirror holder set
Mirror operation lever-B
Mirror operation lever spring
: > — MIEL + re i
i9- HEN, b
(EL i—
:5- MEL AT] Y
GA
38
21. Mirror cushion/ $ Я—Яухах
Type A Type B Type C Type D
2006-5112-02 (x) 2006-5112-03
Type A is used. Type C is used.
Type AXE Type CA ft
Artificial leather
2006-5114-81 (X) 2006-5114-01
Not used. 10mm | Туре С is used.
тео TG Ff Type CE (EH
© Artificial leather
Seams ABS
2006-5120-81 En
Not used. Not used. Not used. 37
f5 FL Zu (FAL Zu PAL ew
e For mirror bounce in bodies of Type A or В, follow the procedure given below. (For example, once the cause
of trouble has been eliminated, it is unnecessary to follow the procudure any more.)
® Type A, XIIBNHF-TIiF- HU 7 FHAREL TWSLMILIUYTIL, LI FOMECMERL TFS,
MAEDTANZDONE, OTHHIIOUBROMARITEtTT)
@ Replace 5112 and 5114 with Type С.
(2) Stick 5120-81. (Confirm the returning of mirror when shutter releases at the “B” setting with the body up-
side-down, after bond the mirror arm cushion on the mirror holder arm.)
@) Replace 5042 (see next section) with Type B.
(4) Replace 5042 and 0523 (see next section) with Type C.
(1) 5112. 51142 Type CIU jars
a
=
D 5120-81 alt Me AF Ae PELL,
3 5042 (ХФ) & Type Bir CMTS.
4) 5042, 0523 (KIA) & Type CILSEJAT 3.
5120
Mirror holder arm
29- Ar F-F-L
eee SR
A AA AAA A PT RS A ee eee
BTLIU=XLAI3235>—S4 MAT 3 ZE EPA 3)
2006-5112 Mirror cushion 2
2006-5114 Mirror cushion-B
2006-5120 Mirror orm cushion
rrr eee ee eee eee ee ee E u on PEA
y ft
|
|
ь =
Le
ш
E
195-=%w335B
e e LI IF 3 7
es es es
e AAA A AGA RA
22. Preset operation lever / TU € y HL ,\—
2006-5042-02
Type A Type B Type C
2006-0523-01 2006-0523-02
Type A is used.
Type At (FH
= 9.52
haz
2006-5042-03
Wire diameter : 0.2600 Wire diameter : 0,23mm Wire diameter : 0, 73mm
No. of windings : 21.5 №. of windings . 19.5 No. of windings : 23.5
BE: 0.26 ME: 0.23 = MA : 0.23
ME: 21.5 ЖЗ : 19.5 ЖИ: 23.5
2006-5042-04
9.85 ва
23. Operation lever-B base (right) / $ 7—HHEL/1—B M2 (4)
e Type B is used for deformed mirror box.
e Type Bi 3 35 -#, 7ARKRMOLSGARTT.
Type A
Type B
2006-0561 -01
2006-0561 -8]
24. Release lever spring/ 37—L UY —XULN=ATU LF
e Type B is used when mirror return lever lock claw (0522) is unstable in stopping power (in order to increase
the stopping power.) When Type B is used, be careful that 0522 should not unlock.
e Type Bis i 3 -KLL фо 1 7M (0522) OMNES LOMIOMENTOET (ENE tory),
Type BE (BALL 21105220 fit BARR EEL OC Fat.
Type A
2006-5023-02
Type B
2006-5023-82
2006-0523 Preset operation lever set Fit» RL s—+t |
2006-0561 Operation lever-B base sel = 7—MfEL ВМО H (4)
2006-5023 Release lever spring :7-L'-XLri-AT0,Y7
2006- 5042
Mirror-up spring
IST TAT 7
LOÍ
39
25. Spool gear / AF —I¥V—
Type A Type B Type C Type D
2006-0325-12 2006-0325-13
Type A is used. Type C is used.
Type АН Type С& {8
2006-3042-01 2006-3042-01 2006-3042-01 2006-3042-03
Type B is used.
Туре В & #8
(Туре В can be used.) (Type C can be used.) (Type B can be used.)
(Туре В fl) TE) (Type С (E FA 57 f€) (Type В f# HIGT AE)
26. Winding stop gear / #1b%L/‘\—
e Types B and C are used for the adjustment of bodies of which the operation timing of winding claw and wind-
ing stop lever is not in correct order as shown below.
(Correct timing when winding lever is slowly returned from the position of complete winding)
e Туре В, CH@RME# EA LE 7 4 1779, ЕО: G5 TORU -OMBATT.
BLIRTRRUPSRLILI- ER SH EMLÉMOEMAS 277)
{| me — 22
| cp a |
Winding Claw
SE
(Windling claw engaged)
METAS)
Winding operation lever-A reversed
(RAGE LI— FB)
Type A Type B Type C
2006 - 3012-01 2006-3012-81 2006-3012-85
Od
== — 10.65 ва -- — =
2006-0325 Spool gear set A7-n#r-t,!
2006-3012 Winding stop lever *inmL+:-
2006-3042 Spool inner barrel 47- VAR
\v*
27. Reset lever / U ty RL/\—
Type A Type B
2006-3020-01 2006 -3020-02
=EA ESA
2006-9011-03 2006-9011-05
2006-9441 -01
Not used.
(PAL & ue
28. Light shield plate / MAH
Type A Type B
2006-1066-01
Not used.
fEALL Sw
u) de
2006- 1066 Light shield plate EA!
2006- 3020 Reset lever ‘Jt + FL
2006-9011 Winding stop lever axis iS Li
2006-9441 Winding stop lever base *2ikYL+*—+
42
29. Mode switch / €— KAT vy F
Type A
Type B
2006-0440-01
2006-0440-02
=
2006-1110-02 -
2006-1110-05
2006 -3309-02
2006- 3309-04
2006-3312-01
2006-3312-02
No used.
(EL Ge
2006-4025-01
2006- 0440
2006-1110
2006- 3309
2006-3312
2006-4025
Self-timer change holder set ++ 70 MRA HU + |
Back cover lock lever MMU > 7 Lt
Rewinding axis receiver ®ELM?
Light shield collor F*ELE%k»>-
Contact receiver АМН
NA
30. Back cover hinge / ME
. +
AZ
® One of Types C—F must be used for hard leather bodies.
en FRIÈOAT—-ILÈType C—FOU TNA LEMOZE,
Type A Type B Type C
2006-1105-02 or 2006-1105-04 (X) 2006-1105-04 (X)
2006-1105-03 (X) 2006-1121-81
=>, coe COountersink
ax
&
Countersink 15
discontinued.
il E
MAL
1105
1121 ‘
9693-2045-01 (Screw!
+ 9695- 2050-01
2006-9121-03 (Screw)
(es) Type B is used.
€ Type ВЯ ЕН!
‚For 1105 fitting) se
(11054 (FI)
Type D Type E Type F
2006-1105-81 (x) 2006-1105-05 (X) 2007-1105-03
2006-1121-01
Cr Countersink 15 |
dı tinued.
y ee ph RE
1105
na [8
eS = 50.7 т |
Q
e
J y
Type A is used. Type B is used. Type B is used.
Туре A* (El Type ВИН Type B& (4H
a u m, m, a,
2006-1105 |
2007-1105 |
2006-1121
Hinge LE
Light shield packing
A A — |
43
5
44
31. Strap hanger / № MR
e Type B is servicing part for users who use the camera very often.
o Type Bi 7 2 SOPRA MRA BF BORA ЕАМ ост.
Type A Type B
2006-1012-02 2006-0112-81
Bush
Java
32. Film guide screw/ 74/44 КЕХ
e Type В is used for bodies of which screw hole is deflected.
e Type BRL AROMMATNTU SAT —-ICEML à T.
Type A Type B
2006-9102-03
2006-9102-81
33. Dial axis / 44 "Л
Type A
Type B
2006-0272-01 (X)
2006-0272-02
2006-0274-01
2006-0272 Dial axis set FA
2006-0274 ASA resistor set
2006-0112 Strap hanger se!
2006-1012 Strap hanger № №
2006-9102 Film guide screw 74%L974 FHA
Tv ik@@t yb
В] ЕАН |
mit yb
34. Flexible circuit base plate / FLX Ул
[Flexible circuit base plate set / 7-+>7J-BRty hb
o Flexible circuit base plate set can be classified
as shown below according to the IC, (HIC) attach-
ed.
o For the measures against and the types of IC,,
refer to the next page.
e Regarding other elements on the flexible circuit
base plate, the present type (parts list P. 17) can
be used for Types A and B. |
OF LES TNA y MEM Sn TU SIC, (НС):
E-»>TFRNDE I: AW SHES.
IC II SAHNE, AR UIC MAI DUTIEXA
— JA BIALT тав.
ег LOK PON TI, ВЕТ (0-9
JA RP.17) 440$ {Тур A, BEN TAET,
Type A
2006-0401-01 (x)
NOS
Type B
Type C
2006 -0402-02 (Xx)
2006 - 4304-03 or
2006 - 4304-04
2006-0403-03
— 2006 - 4304-05 or
2006-4304 -06 or
2006 - 4304-07
45
107 y
Bic, (HIC)
e With Ru and Cy of next section [3] added to IC, of Type В, the performance is the same as Types E and Е.
e Туре BOIC ZAMCDORn, Cw MF ВЫ Туре Е, FEMME 2 DE.
Type A
Type B
Type C
2006- 4304-02 (X)
2006-4304-03 (X)
D,
O
0D
2006 -4304-04 (X)
Pattern for Ёы
ME — 2
e D, is added.
eD, 61
Type D Type E Type F
2006-4304-05 (x) 2006-4304-06 (x) 2006-4304-07
e D, is discontinued, and circuit is
modified.
e Pin is modified to metallic pin,
e DML. MATT
®VE ER ITE
OU
CU
AAA AA A MN
e Ci is added.
@C iE fl
o Pattern is modified.
ervty— TT
0
47
[Measures to be taken / Æ MXML OUT
If the faulty operation of camera as mentioned below takes place, take one of the following measures.
D Fit the repair part. (2) Replace IC, (4304). & Replace flexible circuit base plate set.
Part No. taken measures
| Measures | —
Faulty operation ports IC Flexible circuit
à base plate set
e Depressing shutter button with mode switch OFF, shutter is és, (Fig. 1), 0402-02
not released when mode switch is turned ON. 4304-03
@lt i ble to release self-timer ration, 0402-02
из una a Hna qua с. | (LED board is
e Self-timer starts when mode switch is shifted to SELF (Fig. 2) — modified in
after depressing shutter button with mode switch OFF. e pattern.)
Wie contact failure with Sy; | 4304-05
® Winder operates when mode switch is moved. Ru (Circuit is 0402-03
e Self-timer starts when mode switch is shifted from OFF to (Fig. 3) wa
modified. )
SELF.
e Self-timer starts when a flash of high trigger voltage is Ci 4305-06 0402-03
flashed to test. (Fig. 2) |(Cye is built in.)
(Refer to next page for Figs. 1~3. )
Note : Avoid overlapping of different measures. (For example, fitting Ru to IC, of -05. All measures have been
taken in -07 for IC, supplied for servicing at present.)
‚ To fit Сю results in completion of the measure to be taken for Cy.
: When replacing IC, of -02 with IC, of the flexible circuit base plate set after -03, it is necessary to use
lead wire fy.
КЕ ср T
ТЕЗ 2 FAOPORRARNSMSAAN ETAT OAT, Ott MAA Mt 5. OIC, (4304) ORM, @7
LES TIME) LOZA LL EO KA a OMMBEIT TKS.
at М Во A
m : ©
я! и в (ЕН Е) IC, rt, /nklit,;!}
ФЕ— FSW. OFFT7 +, 97 -SDERLFEEIL, FOKRETE- FE I eu (Fig. 1) 0402-02
SW. fONI-L The ev LI XL Gt. 4304-03
SEN TIÄT-TMERET ZU, С 0402-02
o = — ESW. OFF T > 49-я The, =- КМ. #SELF (Fig. 2) — Dei ld
OMA SEU TEL ITAA RTS. E — 2 EEE )
Sr HIER T ARE
ФЕ— КМ. ШУТ 742 ¥—a EMT 5. ms feats 0402-03
e E- FSW. FOFF-=SELF ¿ODMR15£ TeV TH AS bh TS, E Er)
“er HA-AEN ENTF HS Ara, LL 7 DAS — Cre 4305-06 0402-03
PFI, (Fig. 2) (C 10 A)
(Fig. 1-3 11 o— ER)
EE: BRE MAL ZU Ze. (AZIZ-O5MIC, СВ, OBRA. REN+-VARBANIC, (1-07, TOR HN
апт.)
: Co ШИН 3 EIN, СТОЯТЬ ИЕТ.
» O2MIC, E-O0LUUB С. МТФ, И-нет.
104
48
Brig. | Fig. 2
Replacing IC, of -02 with IC, that is on and Fitting of Cie
after -03. Cr OMT
-02MIC, &-OSLIEMIC, I RT SMS
Battery case lead wire (Red) pattern
Ear -—2— FR) 0/19—>
AAAAAAL
Cw (0.047 @F)
(9564-4738-32)
BFig. 3
Fitting of Ru
Ви MRT lt
Battery case lead wire (red) pattern
Bier —-2')- FR (M) N0113->
Я, (100K )
(9422- 1046-32)
49
26. Winding base plate-B / #RGKB
Reference
Type A Type B Type C pego
2006-0384-01 2006-0384-81 (x) 2006-0384-02
Plastic ¡TIA FS 7
Body (No supply / ЗЕ 8) Body (No supply / ЗЕ) Body (No supply / 31448)
r == _ oe
o o o о
» - . :
гг] | we oo | ==)
2006- 0151-02 2006-0151-05 2006-0151-05
(Type B) P. 41
® Type B can be used.
® Туре В! Шо] Е
2006-0338-01 2006-0338-02
(Type B)
2006-0340-02 or 2006-0340-02 or
2019-0340-12 2019-0340-12
(Type B) P. 46
Continued to next page / Ar—- SIM
2006-0151 Front base plate set mMHt-»+$
2006-0338 Winding base plate À set #M#MRA+- TH
2006-0340 nt
2019-0340 Winding operation plate set ЮЖНЕЕ > + \\\
2006-0384 Winding base plate В set ЕВЕ yt »
50
Type A Type B Type C
2006-0381 -01 2006-0381-01 2006-0381 -02
(Type A)
2006-0382-01 2006-0382-01
Type № nt La
2006-0383-01 2006-0383-01 2006-3412-03
To A es
2006-3407 -06 2006-3407-06 2006-3407 -08
(Type A)
2006-0386-01
(Type A)
2006-3410-02
$~——
2.4mm
2006-3410-02
(Type A)
2006-3410-03
DT”
2006-3414-03
a,
2006-3414-03
(Type A)
2006-3414-07
2006-3416-02
2, Bum >)
2019-3416-05
3.Bem
2019-3416-05
(Type B)
Type A Type B Type C
2006- 3409-02 2006- 3409-02
Not used.
se (Type A) ALE
9612-1416-07
(Phillips type screw)
9612-1416-07
(Phillips type screw)
(Type A)
9762- 1745-02
(Tap tite screw)
. Y
im)
Lu
9693- 2045-01
9691- 2045-07 (x 21
9693- 2045-01
(Phillips type tapping screw) (Phillips type tapping screw)
9693- 2045-01
9691- 2045-07 (x 2)
(Type A)
9761- 2055-07 (x 3)
(Tap tite screw)
2006- 9106-01 (Screw)
2006-9106-01 (Screw)
(Type B)
2006-0381 Counter
ratchet set #29-5+2.,k4 HR
2006-0382 Return lever set to') F#—vyLii-ty}
2006-0383 ‘Counter
2006-0386 Counter
2006-3407 Counter
2006-3408 Counter
2006-3409 Counter
2006-3410 Counter
2006-3412 Counter
operation gear-A set 79> 7—@H¥4-—+ + |}
operation lever sel 77> 97—ERM)MPEL + +?
index #72 9—th
operation lever #77: 7—MAMMfEL 1
operation lever spring 7?” 7—IEMAfEL “SP
operation gear-B #7-5-Hmrtr-
operation gear-A 4° > 97-4847 -
2006-3414 Return lever spring +40'9-2L+*-SP
2006-3416 Winding
2006-9001 Winding
operation lever-A spring + + #58" -L+s—SP
operation lever-A screw HEN L:—¡EDYZ
51
119
52
27. Winding operation plate set / # RMF + > I
2006-9108
Left-handed screw—— |
D
=) 2019-9108
Right-handed screw—— |
u “ED;
& (2019-0340)
Type A Type B a
2006-0340-01 or 2019-0340-12
2006-0340-02 a
Left-handed screw — Right-handed screw
EAL BAL À
P. 43
2006-9108-03 2019-9108-01
m
Disassembly, Assembly and Adjustment
MFor disassembly, refer to the related pages in the reverse order as the contents
of this manual are arranged in the order of procedures for assembling and ad-
justing.
— Abbreviations —
+ : Assembly note and reference.
[G] : Grease to be used and where to apply it.
[0] : Oil to be used and where to apply it.
: Bond to be used and where to bind.
: Special tool No. and where to use it.
Ш Disassembling Procedures Chart
P.46 P.46 P.45
| Bottom cover - [Top cover }- >} Disassembling |
у P.27
| Removal of soldering |
P.25 P.24
| Flexible circuit base plate) ————+] Shutter dial base plate}
4 P.21
Front base plate |
Battery case base plate |
Front base plate
disassembling
]
| Воду disassembling |
P. 9 ı P.10 | | P.20 Р.19
| Disassembling Back cover | Penta, prism holder = Disassembling |
P 6 P. 7 , P.17
| Disassembling P—— Winding base plate в] : Magnetic release
| = Disassembling
POS base plate.
| Winding operation plate | 4P.17 Shutter service manual
P4 | Pp 3 [Shutter] = Disassembling}
Winding base plate ‘|
| Disassembling }+—— E pe р P.14
| Bayonet lens mount |
P 3
} Р. 2 P.13
Winding axis ee] > Front base plate}
Sprocket
P.12- 11
q Pol
=
| Strapring | = Mirror box |
[15
М Assembling/Adjustment Procedures Chart
+ Be carefull with assembling/adjustment of body as following points. Because this camera's
body is used resin.
1. Creaner can use only FLONSOLVE or Alchol. Do not use thinner, ketone and ether.
2. Use correct screws only and install to vartical against part. DO NOT OVERTIGHT.
3. Use the countermeasure screw instead of the screw when screw hole is loosen. (See
Parts list).
(Body part (P.1—P. 10)
Р. 1
[Strap ring
Ш P.7 P.6
mu Winding base plate B
Winding ba late B
| es Erro [rae
Sprocket |
huh Resto rec] 1. Winding operation timing checking +++++++++++++..+: Pg
2. Reversing stop claw timing adjustment --------- P.8
+P. 3 PA 3. Winding claw and stop lever timing checking--- P. 9
[ Spooı } | Spoo! gear assembling 4. $, (Reset SW.) ON-OFF checking +++. Р 9
Р. 4
act. Winding base plate MA Р. 9
| Winding base plate А}-—— А assembling Back cover Back cover assembling |
$ :
| Sprocket positioning---P. 4] Film counter adjustment---P 10 |
| P.5 |
| Winding operation plate | Body part finished]
2]Front base plate block (P.11~P.20)
P.M, 12 P.13
[Mirror box } { Front base plate}
P 17 P. 18
7
Magnetic release Magnetic release base
base plate plate assembling
1 P 14
| Mirror box + Front base plate | | P 20 P.19
Penta. prism holder
Penta. prism holder Lay
[Pe р assembling |
4 Р 14 J
| Bayonet lens mount | | P.20
4 | Front cover]
| I. Preset lever position checking + Р 15
2. Aperture coupling ring operation checking -------- p 15
3. Mirror angle adjustment een P 16 | Front base plate part ished
» P.17
Emma ‚| Shutter performance
| checking P.45—P 48
Shutter service manual
——+| Shutter assembling |
IN
То completion of body (P. 21-P.51)
P.1~10 P.11~20
[ Body part | ————— Front base plate
P.21
| Body + Front base plate]
| Over-charge volume adjustment---P. 22]
4 P.21
Charge lever
Battery case base plate
| Р 25 | Р.24
| Flexible circuit base plate — si |
Р.27
Soldering}
1. AUTO exposure adjustment er :-P.3-P.3
2, Manual sec. time adjustment +++ -+-- ‚Р 34
3. AUTO exposure checking een Г „.Р 35
4. Indicating LED checking and adjustment +++ nennen ....- Р 35
5 Touch SW. operation cheching rss ...- Р 36
6. Over-range lock checking + neesnennnsnnnnessannnnsnnnnennnannnnnnenenananennanen nenn nannte Р 37
7, Magnetic release minimum operation voltage and release lock voltage checking + P.37
$. ВС lamp lighting voltage checking еее еее, … р 38
9. Indicating LED minimum lighting voltage checking scene - Р 39
10. Sell- timer operation Checking rss -- Р 39
11. Minimum operation voltage checking еее ~ p.40
12. Sync. time lag checking еее -P 40
13. Strobo function checking + nen “PM
14. Body back adjustment + - Р 43
15. Finder back adjustment -- 7-7 er ---- Р 44
фР 46 -P.45
[our nt } | Top cover assembling}
| Body completed
[|1
[1] Strap ring - Light shielding packing
« Place it about 5—бтт this side of rewind side
in the direction of arrow from body groove end.
9612-2065-01 (x 2)
+ Be careful of top and bottom.
[2] Sprocket: Winding axis receiver-S, (Reset SW.)
« Check 3028 after mounting. 9012
S,lag plate set ere |
3027 ++ Do not deform or stain
| SS
— |
} 3028
| Ky 0 Y Ste
¡+ AG) #1150-D |
| EN + arrow-marked
part to body.
3029 |
|
3057 | 9691 -1728-07
Fit it м 3357 м the
direction of arrow.
sprocket into body.
+ Do not allow it to be
declined or loose.
+ Push it in the direction of arrow and
stop it temporarily.
i à
5 contact
«+ Fit it on body projection
It should be tight on body support pole.
+ Do not deform or stain
\
ee KL 5 Winding axis receiver
$ 1150-D (Periphery and incida) SS Es
ay,
N |
—
Sprocke
rs
_ 5
‘SO side should be al body top.
y
A
t
D
ШЕЮ. 1 3027 SP setting
Body top
[3] Spool . Winding base plate A set
9691 -2040-07 (= 3)
Ш Assembly (P. 4)
Ш Refer to assembly procedure (P. 4)
Winding base plate A set
LL [©] #3340 (inside)
1
| 3055 | + Fit it in sprocket shaft slot
i
1
|
1
1
|
3053
|
|
1
++ insert a screwdriver into slot and turn
i it while pushing lightly.
Sprocket shaft + Take care not to bend R button lock spring
+ After mounting check its engagement with
sprocket.
|
|
1
|
1
|
|
|
1
у WM Assembly (P. 4)
Spool gear set |
| NS
AS | (=
| a < + Fit arrow-marked part in sprool groove.
! i
A
ae K SH
+ Spool | | a
a es |
А
ils
N = LE
É a | 9721 -0200-13
y
[G] # 1150-0 3421
(Bottom proyection
and mide) CG
+ When mounting spool, let it be free
ın the direction of arrow
| к,
\Y
Ш Spool С set assembly D Winding base plate A set assembly
3043 EME #335 (top and bottom sides) —
3049 (Ci) + Edge side should be down
re E + Slip it onto dashed- line arrow-
marked part in the direction
3046 of arrow iprojection of 3049)
[G] #3340
(Inside and
[G] #3340 (Gear and gear top) gear part)
ds
Spool gear de : + Let reversing stop claw be free
4 Pp Iq im the direction of arrow.
| y Га
"Обои han hoe
3058 | | [G] # 3340
=
| © | Winding base (Shaft receiver and gear)
| | | plete А
| EN |
| 3047 & i Brig 2
| | + Slip И onto аггом- та ед part ,
| | tas shown by dashed line).
| o y aad
| ES 9794-7194-20 Reversing stop claw
=
| de Cut end of spring should not [G] #3340 (Back side spool gear contact)
‚ 3044 come to the gap of 3045. |
| Fig. 2 3037 SP setting
| 3048 & + Edge side should be up.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ka
Ш Winding base plate A set assembly (Sprocket positioning)
l. Matching the punch mark on 3032 with the line
Eccentric screw
connecting 3032 center to 3033 center of wind- 2. Holding sprocket claw in the position as illust -
ing base plate A set, make the adjustment by
eccentric screw so that reversing stop claw
rated, fit sprocket gear projection in sprocket
shaft groove, and thus mount the winding base
touches the notch of 3032. plate A set as in (1).
« Checking Г
1. When spool is turned clockwise, each gear and sprocket should rotate smoothly.
2. When spool is rotated once and reversing stop claw is fitted in the notch of 3032,
sprocket and each gear should be in the positions as illustrated. When sprocket has
been returned in the direction of arrow, it should be at “0” position.
3. Pushing R button should cause sprocket to idle, and R button should become released
when spool is turned.
4] Winding operation
plate set
ШЕЮ. 3 3021 SP setting
3021
MFig.4 3040 SP setting
| Projection
Shutter charge gear C
9108 + Left-handed screw
| Ca #3360 (periphery)
+ Set 3009 on dashed-line part and charge it about 220°
in the direction of arrow to engage it with shutter
charge gear C and stop it on projection of winding
shaft receiver.
+ Be careful of position of Е.
+ Fit it in dashed-line arrow-marked part.
E
|
|
|
|
|
р
i
i
ET
oa 2012 EP rue
en eu
+ Mount it after
setting 0360
Winding operation plate set
+ Let 3040 be free in the direction of arrow
Support it with finger in the position as illustrated.
+ Checking:
2. Operation should be smooth with 3020 freed.
[©] # 3340
l. Vertical clearance should be less than 0. 2mm.
Wi Winding base plate В assembly
O + Ве careful of right and left.
+ Set it on @’ of 0386.
“he 2-coil side
9612-1416-07 (x 2)
77
|
ek insert it into dashed-line arrow-marked part.
$ ‘It should be parallel to counter dial.
+ Charge about one tum (300°)
Counter dial in the direction of arrow.
» Check for operation after mounting
ШЕЕ 5
«+ Locate it in the position of dashed- line
arrow-marked part.
F
|
|
|
|
| ‘
|
| da 9721-0120-13
|
| 10386 23
|
|
|
|
|
|
k
“es counter operation gear B
« Check for operation alter
= = | 3411 mounting Bear part
0383
|
|
3415 e) + Ве careful of sides
LT + Check for operation after mounting
9001 & Wrong
N
++ Do not deform,
ШЕЕ 5
ШЕЮ. 5 3404, 3414, 3416 SP setting
197
Bs
/
[5] Winding base plate В set
$ 2006-3003-75
3003
Winding lever
+ Temporary setting
9693 -2045-01 IE Brig 6
Winding base
plate B set
0385
В
ШЕЮ. 7 0385 setting
0. 5 тт
9613-1618 -01
SD
| Mount after checking counting operation (P. 10).
+ Turn film indication filler (3421) in the direction
of arrow lo let it contact the spool.
Thus mount it within the range of Fig 7.
Assembly (P. 6)
+ Position counter drive gear as illustrated and shift
it in the direction of arrow.
№ Refer to the assembly procedure (P. 8).
Counter drive gear 1
“
MB Fig. 6 3424 SP setting
3424
Ш Do checking and adjustment after mounting.
* Re-check winding operation and-sprocket claw
position (P. 4),
* Check winding operation timing (P.8).
+ Adjust reversing stop claw timing (P.8).
" Check winding claw and stop lever timing (P.9).
* Check 5. (winding SW.) ON-OFF operation (P.9).
M@ Winding base plate В set assembly procedure
l. Let reset lever (3020) be free and
charge winding operation plate set
about 90°. Then hold shutter charge
gear C with finger.
2. Fit zero return lever in body notch.
Then engage counter operation gear
A set (0383) with winding gear (3032).
Shutter charge gear C / )
Counter drive gear Zero return lever
MM Winding operation timing checking
1. Slowly do winding. Then, winding operation lever A (3415) should stop winding operation
plate set. If it is defective, check winding operation lever and spring shape. (P. 6)
2. Also, winding operation lever should become disengaged within 1”20” + 1” (about 0. 05—0. 3mm)
before completion of winding.
If timing is wrong, adjust the position of winding base plate B set.
(Before winding) (During winding) (Winding operation timing)
Ш Reversing stop claw timing adjustment
Adjustment: Make the adjustment by eccentric screw so that reversing stop claw starts acting
just before (20°— about 0.05mm) disengagement of winding operation lever when
winding is slowly done and the claw completely stops reversing motion when winding
has been completed.
’ <
я" o :
1" 40°
- = "u
BE
(Reversing stop claw (Winding operation (Reversing stop claw (Winding is
Starts acting.) lever position.) is completely acting.) completed.)
Checking: Timing should be as follows:
Reversing stop claw starts acting Y Winding operation lever is disengaged “Y Revers-
ing stop claw is completely acting (winding completed)
l}
Ш Winding claw and stop lever timing checking
Slowly return the winding lever after completion of winding. Then, the timing should be as
illustrated below.
10°
Winding claw
Body |
(top) )
—- =i
«рек.
Winding stop lever
*
Body у
(bottom) + |
Ф
(Stop lever on 1 st step)
(Winding claw engaged) (Stop lever on 2nd step) (Lever completely returned)
Winding operation lever should return while stop lever moves from 1 st
MS, (Reset SW.) ON-OFF checking
l. Connect circuit tester to S, contact (3026) and S, lag plate (3029).
2;
to 2 nd step.
When winding lever is slowly returned after completion of winding, it should be OFF with
stop lever rested on the lst step and ON with the lever rested on the 2 nd step.
If the timing is wrong, check and adjust contact position and bending.
+
*
Mea?
Ш Back cover assembly
- Be careful of top and bottom.
= Check operation after mounting
1106 | Long
1108
+ Be careful of right and left
+ insert from arrow-marked part
Pressure plate
[6] Back cover-Rewinding axis receiver set
y 9691 -2050-07 (x 3)
L
Assembly (P.9) |
Back cover set
Rewinding axis receiver set
Be careful of front 9692-1740
Tad ton she Ler een
a La
3304 [6] # 1150-0 LE 7 | D
ms
WESER
gt
9
+ Slip И on 3312.
» Check operation after mounting.
|
№ Adjust film counter after mounting.
Ш Film counter adjustment
1. When back cover is closed, counter drive gear (3410) shaft should be in the first groove of
counter ratchet (3403). If deflected, adjust counter index (3407) position.
2. At center of “S" of counter dial should be “4” of counter index (3407). If deflected, adjust
counter index (3407) position.
(Correct) (Wrong)
3. V-groove of counter drive gear (3410) should be positioned as illustrated below. If deflected.
adjust it according to the procedure on Page.7.
4. Counter drive gear (3410) should be engaged with counter ratchet (3403) at the height as
illustrated below. If deflected, check and adjust counter index (3407),
3403 — PTT
Re 0, 7am
3410 and groove position. 3410 and 3403 engagement
+ Checking: Do winding twice from position “5”. Then, counter should indicate “1”.
When further winding is done, there should be no skip, double feed, standstill, etc,
Also, returning operation should be smooth.
127 e
[7] Mirror box |
+ Do not allow scratches or
stains on mirror.
Silicone bond KE-441RTV
Br; <”. Glue it matching arrow-marked part
= 5119 with mirror holder.
er.
[8] Bond G17
9612-1616-07
т
+ Slip it onto projection and
shift in the direction of
5110 arrow,
Fit it on mirror arm and screw it
at center of oval hole.
us
9612-1616-07
+ After mounting 5027, glue it matching DD
arrow.marked face with mirror box а
| 0562
|
“+ Alter mounting 5027 and 5030, glue it
"a a
| 0 | 5030
oe | matching arrow-marked face with
9612-1616-07 + Slip it onto projection and shift in| Mirror box
the direction of arrow. ; Br
|
Fit arrow-marked part in mirror _
= 9612-1616-07 (x 2)
=
5111 SD
ие"
I
i
ie
==”
|
|
arm, then screw il at center of ;
oval hole. |
|
ge + Screw it at center
ro, | р of oval hole.
0561 7106
9612-1616-07 Su 2
a =
+ Slip arrow-marked part onto — | yaa
mirror holder
Dres ! + Glue it matching arrow. marked
5117 sm „= face with mirror box.
® 0521 | <=
| u
|
Locate it in position of dashed-line
arrow-marked part
+ After mounting. check for operation —
9721-0150-13
* After mounting, check for operation we
„=“
we a
9721-0150-13 (x 2) =
PE
5021 :
==
="
=“
=
5023 ..-
Brig 8 В Y 5021
LS
MAfter adjusting mirror edge, apply В screw lock С to
set-screws 0561, 0562, 5110, 5111, 5113.
12
[8] Mirror box II
* After completing assembly, check
for
following procedure.
| 9721-0150-13
lever locking claw. «>
. Shift release bar in the
direction of arrow. |
Then preset lever operates
ь 5044
to raise mirror.
ШЕЕ 9
. When mirror return locking
operation according to the ap 9721-0150-13 (x 2)
Cock mirror return lever in
the direction of arrow until
Preset lever
it is locked by mirror return
claw is pushed in the direc-
tion of arrow, mirror and
preset is returned.
wy E Mirror return lever х 9721 -0150-13
a 13 a Cr |
a m | ES
|
& 0542 9721-0150-13
on 9794-2050-20 &
9405 Zn. 9 | =
+ Mount it before preset + Mount it after 0541 setting
lever setting.
0531
0541
[G] #3340 7
9721-0150-13 4 LK ua
& N.
| [$] #3340 и we
2040 ШЕЕ 9 |
| Mirror return lever lock claw. | a |
A ‘a
a
+ After mounting. check for ru
a
ШЕс. 9 5042, 5044. 5046. 5051
SP setting
Release bar.
13
[9] Front base plate
Grey (+)
Grey (+)
Remote control base
plate set
2291
$ 2006-2291 -75
« After mounting, check
for operation.
Light green
+ Do not allow fingerprints or stains on board.
(Clean with alcohol)
+ Solder lead wires. Fig 10
+ Pass lead wires through hole in front base plate.
4
bac
+ Do not bend or stain contact
«+ Fit in dash-line
part and solder.
—— cn
+ Front base plates with
ШЕЮ. 10 1014 SP setting and circuit
board B lead wire soldering
Light green
=
1014
7 9612-1616-07 (x 3)
«PSlip tube onto thicker leg (—side).
++ There are two LED positions
1008
Pink (+) available. Refer to Shutter
Block Disassembly, Assembly
and Adjustment.
Light brown (—)
9612-1625-07 2641
++ Glue it matching arrow- marked
i face with front base plate.
(бы a...
+ Match arrow-marked face with front base plate
и ae
>”
до
ИД
washers are available
|
| 0571 |
| к * After mounting check
| Bond 617 Y for operation.
men | 4019 4
|
Circuit board B
9611-1625-07 (x 2)
yr
14
10] Front base plate set Bayonet lens mount
+ Fit @ of 0571 onto @ of 5021. |
+ Do not squeeze lead wires.
; : » After setting, release with 0571 and
ШЕЮ. 11 1064 SP setting hack. Tor arcsst lover ма mirra
operation.
/ | 1064
SP end (3-coil)
Crewt board В 8 8 9612-1625-07 (= 3)
+ Clean circuit board В (alcohol or FRONSOLVE |
++ Do not bend or stain brush
(Clean it with alcohol or FRONSOLVE }
Sel 1064 and turn in the direction of
arrow, then fit (Din ©.
|
+ Match (E) and © each other.
+ Match © with © and €:
Coupling ring
M After completing assembling, do checking 1011
and adjustment as follows,
* Check preset lever position (Р. 15)
* Check aperture coupling ring (P. 15) =
* Adjust mirror angle (P. 16). Bayonet lens mount
oe # 242
Bla
Ш Preset lever position checking
Ш Measuring instrument: Standard lens (50mm F 1. 4) № Standard
E
_ When mirror return lever (0524) is cocked
Mount standard lens with minimum aperture
setting. The aperture should become released
when mirror return lever lock claw (0522) is
disengaged. (Preset lever: over 7.7 mm)
until stopping on 0522, aperture should become
released. (Preset lever: over 6.7 mm)
With release operation lever С (0571) released, wit: mm
preset lever operated, and mirror raised,
aperture should be at minimum setting.
(Preset lever: below 0) Closing side «af
Ш Aperture coupling ring
Ш Measuring instruments: Circuit tester,
Le
. Also connect leads (white
. Lightly push coupling ring
Standard lens (50 mm F 1. 4)
Operate aperture coupling ring up to the stop position in the direction of arrow and return
it slowly. Then, it should not be forced back by coupling ring spring (1064) and the opera-
tion should be smooth with out abnormal noise.
. Mount standard lens, connect circuit board B (0152) leads (light green and yellow) as ill-
ustrated below, operate aperture ring.
Then, there should be no skip or standstill of resistance value. (Small resistance with
aperture opened, large
resistance with minimum
aperture. | wit à
and yellow) as illustrated
below, Then, there should
be no skip or standstill of
resistance value.
(Large resistance with
aperture opened, small
resistance with minimum
aperture. )
claw in the direction of
arrow. Then. there should
be no skip or standstill
of resistance value.
Ш Mirror angle adjustment
Ш Measuring instrument: Mirror angle adjuster (Model MA- 1)
№ Standard value : 45° +20’
1. Mirror position (height) adjustment
b.
Set mirror box and front base plate assembly on the measuring instrument. Place it
opposite to the mirror height gauge.
Then make the position adjustment by inserting a screwdriver (with thick end, which
doesn't touch flare preventive seat) into adjusting hole of mirror stopper (5111) so
that gauge end is matched with mirror end.
After adjustment, tighten mirror stopper set-screw and check for deflection.
I
au, Su
N
O /5 _
|
Mirror angle adjuster E и E € 7
Lans box Мои. height gauge
2. Mirror angle (45°) adjustment.
a. Put mirror box opposite to auto meter, and let mirror support stopper A (5110)
and B (5113) be free in the direction of arrow.
b. Look into auto meter and make the adjustment by inserting screwdriver into
adjusting hole of mirror operation lever B shaft base (0561, 0562) from mirror box
side so that the chart image center comes to the cross.
c. Tighten set-screw of mirror operation lever shaft base, and then check.
> $e
Correct
. After adjusting mirror angle, looking into auto meter to see that the chart image
stays on the cross, shift mirror auxiliary stopper A (5110) B (5113) in the direction
opposite to te arrow so that it comes in contact with mirror operation lever pin
(9215) and mirror holder contact pin (9216), and then tighten set-screws
Correct Wrong Wrong Wrong
« Mirror operation checking
Operate mirror several times from back of mirror box. Then check that chart image is within
standard value (45°+20’) and that chart image shows no change.
Check
if mirror is declined or mirror height is changed.
WM After checking mirror operation, apply screw-lock to each set-screw.
16
[32
17
11] Shutter - Magnetic release base plate
Shutter
mounting, check for operation
9613-1645-07
|
Ш Assembly (P 18)
in pre-charge state of preset lever, arrange lead
wire as illustrated and shift it м the direction of
| Magnetic release base plate.
7611-1625-07 (x 3)
Ш Magnetic release base plate assembly
MFig. 12 2039 SP setting
9612-1425-07 | x 2)
9721 -0120-13
0581188) (5 9790-1530-20 or 2099
| + 9791 -1530-20
$ ‚ 2030
Ш Polarity checking method N 2039 $
(See illustration at right :
bottom)
0582 « After mounting, check 2030 for operation
№2028 polarity checking method
9721-0120-13 Connect & side to brown lead
ar and С side to black of 0583 as
illustrated below. When it is
stationary with 2028, then top
ee gee ge N
side is N pole.
+ Do not allow stains on
contact surface.
(Clean with alcohol
or FRONSOLV)
Screw-lock G
+ Do not allow stains on contact surface. 2028
for deflection and inclination. ~
Ш Shutter assembly procedure
l. Arrange lead wires of shutter block and front base plate as illustrated below.
2. Let mirror return lock claw (0522) be free on front base plate side to make it in pre-charge
state. (P.17)
3
- On shutter block side, operate charge gear А (2105) in the direction of arrow and mount
shutter block in the state of winding completed. (P. 17)
D
* After mounting, cock mirror return lever (0524) to release, and check that shutter operate
properly.
139,
19
Ш Pentagon holder assembly
ШЕЮ. 13 5016 SP setting
(В) В 9693-2040-07
pentagon holder.
+ Fit @ on projection of
pentagon holder.
[В] Bond 617
| Fit ® on projection of |
+ Fit on projection of pentagon holder.
|
Re"
5016
Fig 13
\
DP,
+ Mount 5017
5803
stains or fingerprints.
5007
+ Do not allow scratches,
stains or fingerprints.
«+ Glue on 5005 in the direction
of arrow.
“+ Ве careful of sides
and positions.
SF Do not allow scratches, stains.
fingerprints, and be careful of
sides and positions.
Direction indicating mark
5011
+ Do not allow scratches,
E
A insert after mounting 5010.
20
12] Pentagon holder set-Front cover
@ 9612-1635-07 (x 3)
Ш Assembly (P. 19)
8 . * Do the job before mounting front cover.
+ Be careful of lead wires.
« After mounting, check for operation
+ Mount it with 0586 attached
Refer to mounting procedure.
Ra 9612-1616-07
Ш Front cover mounting procedure
1. Widen front cover in the direction of arrow and fit it in remote control terminal (4232) and
synchro terminal (2291) on the right, and in aperture coupling ring (0120).
2. Operate aperture coupling (0120) to the right to fit it on the left side of front cover.
+ Precautions for mounting
1. Do not bend brush of aperture coupling ring (0120).
2. If front cover connection is broken, secure
it with set-screws, taking care not to allow
any difference in level.
« Checking after mounting
1. Remote control terminal (4232) and synchro
terminal (2291) should be fitted in front
cover,
2. Lens lock button (0586) should be smooth in
operation.
1
3. Operate coupling ring to the right up to stop di
G
position and slowly return it. С.
forced back by coupling ring SP (1064) ог K
Then, it should move smoothly without being
abnormal noise. (See Page. 15.)
[3] Front base plate-Charge lever-Battery case base plate set
№ Refer to mounting procedure.
Batter mounting, adjust over-charge
volume. (P. 22)
A
и
|
7)
Y
- PA u m. aly
= = .
Fi by = h # al
р. Е sr n fy 4
F - y IF, у a
„ie г
3024 ( ¿ + Be careful of screw hole position.
Г] |
| ||
во
| 2035 | J
Brig 14 ©
[G] #3340
Charge lever
Battery case base [6] #3340 „=
plate set PR A 9692-1740-07
WM Reter to mounting ¿ES ВАЙ - 8
procedure (P. 23) Bd e @ Reler to mounting
procedure. (P. 23) ho
u SÓ (==
M Fig. 14 2035 SP setting
=
\
Ш Front base plate set mounting procedure
1.
Mount front base plate set, with body and 2. Shift winding shaft receiver (0310) in the
shutter in the state of pre-charge, and direction of arrow so that the — mark of
temporarily fasten front base plate set- charge gear A (2105) is engaged with
screws and shift the plate in the direction shutter charge gear C (3016) as illustrated
of arrow, then tighten the set-screws in below, and then tighten up set-screws.
the order of numbers.
Ш Over-charge volume adjustment
+ Over-charge or under -charge checking
1:
A
3.
Set rewinding lever (3020) free and do winding. (Only shutter is charged).
If winding is heavy towards ending, shutter is over-charged. (Do not wind by force. )
Charge mirror return lever (0524). (It is charged on mirror box side.)
Operate release connecting lever C (0571) to release shutter.
If shutter is not released with mirror raised, it is under-charged. At that time, mirror
is kept raised. Then releasing mirror return lever lock claw (0522) causes mirror to be
lowered and mirror box to get into the state of pre-charge.
However, shutter is still under-charged.
+ Over-charge volume adjustment
Do winding to operate 2nd curtain stop lever (0219) in the direction of arrow (charge on
shutter side). Adjust eccentric screw (9281) of shutter charge gear D (0350) at the bottom
of body so that sprocket idle gear (3034) is over-charged by | tooth (3°40’) from the
position of control base plate (0202).
. М adjustment is impossible, re-adjust in accordance with front base plate mounting
procedure.
9281
22
23
Ш Charge lever mounting procedure
1. Cock mirror return lever (0524).
2. Insert charge lever (3016) into charge pin (9294) of charge control plate (0360), then set
release operation lever spring (2035) as illustrated below.
3. Set charge lever (3016) on charge pin (9228) of mirror return lever (0524).
Cautlen: Take care not to deform charge lever and mirror return lever.
| O > ЧМ
SBS
* After mounting. do the following checks.
1. Winding operation is smooth without catching or the like.
2. Shutter and preset are charged with over-charge volume assured.
3. Release magnet does not become loose due to winding shock or the like.
4. When release connecting lever -C (0571) is operated, preset mirror mechanism operates and
shutter is release. But the curtain does not open when shutter is at high speed condition.
5. After releasing, when winding stop lever is set free by charge lever, the next winding is
possible.
6. Clearance between charge lever (3016) and charge pin (9228) is not excessive.
Ш Battery case set mounting procedure
l. Arrange lead wires on body side (green and black leads for shutter; brown and black leads
for release magnet.) and red lead for battery case as illustrated below.
2. Tighten set-screws of battery case in the order of numbers.
|
¡4 5 | y
rn UE „= = =
So > - E @
`` ыы „ ——— —
Ye # ==.
_
* After mounting, temporarily fasten lower cover. Make sure that winder (8731-200) can be
smoothly mounted and winder-side connecting terminal and body-side winder connecting terminal
(9243) can be connected to each other.
24
Ш Shutter dial base plate assembly
WFig. 19 ASA brush holder and dial
axis setting position
+ Do not bend or stain brush.
«+ Fit in 2009 groove and attach
it as shown in Fig 19.
Fitth click groove
holder and temporarily fasten it.
Do not bend it when mounting ASA brush holder groove position
dial axis. ‘
ASA brush holder
+ Set it belore mounting «+ Do not bend or stain brush
dial axis. 5 + Mounting position (Fig 19.)
Flexible circuit board
WFig. 18 Flexible circuit board and
lead wire soldering.
+ Do not bend or stain brush. A
sh Alter mounting 0271, shift the
fork of AM changeover lever
+ Do not allow stains or lee
on sliding surface of circus! EE
board A “A Es
(Clean with FRONSOLVE or alcohol ¡e
+ Ве careful of $, (Bulb SW.) 7
(Fig. 171
«+ Alter connecting it to shutter
dial base plate, solder flexible 2009
board and lead wires. (Fig 18: Mounting position (Fig. 15)
A р
Board holder
AM changeover pe
Shutter dial base plate
+ Do по! bend or stain contact -
+5, (metering SW. |
Check the position
ШЕЕ 15
Flexible circuit board.
M Fig. 15 2012 SP setting ШЕс. 16 S, (metering SW.) WFig. 17 $, (bulb SW.) position
and 2009 position S, (release SW.) checking
Each contac! should be tight on each support. L_.
Sy
HI
14] CdS board-Flexible circuit board
200 (E # 2006-2020-75
|
Shutter button set
E Temporary nut [T] # 2006-3309-75
+ Do not bend or stain brush
ASA dial plate
2005 Fit in dashed-line part.
If ASA is ind
+ Set shutter dial to AUTO. Fit ASA is indicated, bend it in the
|
|
Self-timer switch
contact holder.
direction of arrow to make the
adjustment,
2014 | 9612-1630-07 6992-1740-07
7 6992-1745-07
# 335 4
| S | E 9912-1685-07 |
+ Fit projection in groove of | Shutter dial. | (>) 9793-1950-86
ASA brush ;
SA holder + Clean pattern
+ Assembly (P. 24)
«+ Check for dust in finder
before mounting.
+ Refer to mounting procedure
(P. 26).
9692-1740-07 (x 2)
5006
Ne
0881
+ Be careful of front and back,
scratches and stains.
W After completing this page, solder lead wires according to
wiring diagram, and make the adjustment according to the
procedure given on and after Page 28. Glue after finishing adjustment and
checks given on and after Page. 28.
wr
26
М Flexible circuit board mounting procedure
l. Arrange body side lead wires as illustrated below, and temporarily fasten flexible circuit
board under contacts A, B, C (1055, 1056, 1057) of CdS board.
2. Mount LED board with rewind axis receiver (3309) positioned at center.
* NOTE: Do not allow lead wires to be squeezed and 1.El) board to become loose.
D
i
L
3309
4. Insert flexible circuit board on shutter dial plate side as illustrated below.
‘Temporarily fasten it with auto lock plate guide (2016) and two set-screws, and stop auto
lock plate (2015) on dial axis (0272).
Adjust spring position so that click spring (2015) in fitted in click groove as illustrated.
+ Checking: Slowly turn dial axis from right to left, then auto lock plate should get into
lock position. When auto luck button is pushed again, it should be positioned
in lock position.
Flexible circuit board
Front cover
ery Fire
o
o
bet В Meg nor Cp)
5450"
ax) Pore
Нун eis
rito
931
ie №
ug lulu запис
pl
Pay Lire 7
uncug LITE
| ang: CIF
$13 oo Fire ae Wa ююз
о proto m sora | | org
ua a), oe en ole
LL |
aut Oo] 5
И
je горох FU à weary
me
af ira
wg =]
I sed ta y
I ga e je) 1
ESIO AS |
ed By '5
étoc (О
104 сю 09 22 Arg
Ото
|
lo
‘pay ВЕРЯ
a = —- п т e En © ———
weseidg эпешацос Зи АА E
it
MW AUTO exposure adjustment
№ Variable resistor and fixed resistor adjustment.
Manual SS 1/1000 adjustment Manual SS 1/30 adjustment
Indication 4" “500” adjustment
Auto CR time “1/30” adjustment 180 mV adjustment
indication level “30” adjustment
[1] Measurement of CdS resistance value and selection of Rj, В;
Ш Measuring instruments:
: Digital tester (Type 2507) |
: Luminescence box (Model L-222 or [.-223)
: Standard lens (50mm, F 1. 4)
: ND filter (MINOLTA ND 50% FOR ADJUSTMENT)
Ш Measuring method
1. Disconnect green lead of CdS board (0591) and soldered В, and К; as illustrated below.
Then connect lead wire for measurement to R, .
Cover to shield outside light.
ND filter
Luminescence box VA
| Measuring body
Digital tester condi tran
« Distance ring at x
L
Lead lor measurement |
2. Measurement of Rm5 (Resistance should be within 10—40КП)
Set digital tester range to “П”, set ND filter on body and then measure resistance value
at luminance EV 11 (ASA 100).
3. Measurement of Ruvl0 (Resistance should be within 1.6~5.8KN)
With CdS connected as above, remove ND filter and measure resistance at luminance EV 15
(ASA 100).
4?
29
№ Selection of Ri, R: ;
From resistance values of Ввуб and Ravl0 obtained by CdS measurement, К; and К, can be
calculated as follows:
1. How to obtain from formula
1/Re 1040 175 Rav 10
R: — RavS | er: Rav 5 ae D
5)?
В, = (Rev ) AAA ©
R;
Pick up resistances which are proximate to the obtained resistance values from the follow-
ing table, and then solder R,, К; and lead wire (Green).
‚ NOTE: When Ra is (—) in formula O), the combination of CdS is defective.
When В; is larger than 1.8KN in formula (), the combination of CdS is defective.
When В; is smaller than 0. ПКП in formula @, shortcircuit R; with lead wire.
Calculating value Calculating value
of R, (KN) uses 050) of R, (KA) ie GRE)
300 >R ( 270K) 0.245>R; > (0.22K M0)
300SR,< 360 (30KN) 0.245<R,<0.3 (0.27KN)
360SR; < 430 ( 390K) 0.3 SR:<0.36 (0.33K N)
430SR, < 515 ( 470KN) 0.36 SR:<0.43 (0.39K (0)
515SR, < 620 ( 560K (A) 0.43 sR;<0.515 (0.47K0)
6205R,< 750 ( 680K 0) 0.515SR; <0.62 (0.56K N)
750SR,< 910 ( 820K) 0.62 SR:<0.75 (0.68K 0)
910SR, < 1100 (1000K N ) 0.75 SR:<0.91 (0.82KQ)
1100SR, < 1350 (1200K N) 0.91 SR; <1.1 (1 Ka)
13505 В, < 1650 (1500 K 1) 1.1 SR;:<1.35 (1.2 KM)
1650s R, < 2000 (1800 K N ) 1.35 SR; <1.65 (1.5 КП)
2000s В, < 2450 (2200K 0) 1.65 SR: (1.8 КП)
245SR, (2700K п)
2. How to obtain from table
a. Select value of RavS or proximate value from vertical axis.
b. Select value of RavlO or proximate value from horizontal axis.
c. Find the intersection of a and b.
The values thus obtained are R,, R, and lead wire (Green): R, at top and R; at bottom.
Then solder Rı and R; obtained from the table.
* NOTE: When К, is 0, connect lead wire to Rj.
If the intersection of RavS and Ra 10 is blank, the combination of CdS is defective.
(Ex.) Revs=20.4KN, Rm10”1.69K(M
a. Approximate value of 20.4KN -20KN.
b. Approximate value of 3.69KN -=3.6КП.
с. Place 20KN on vertical axis and 3.6K] on horizontal axis. From the intersection,
R,: 1500KN and R:: ОКП can be obtained.
mv 10
Rur 5 3.4 3.6 3.8
| 1
| |
| |
19 | |
ms En
20 __J a
21
\d
30
Ш Calculation Table
Top: В, (КП)
Bottom: R; (КП)
in E
10 (КП)
2.2 24 26 28 3 32 3.4 3.6 3.8 4
4.2 4.4 4.6 48 5 52 5.4 5.6
o
i
>
E
o
13
19
21
2/5 818 |
FE:
E
o
Pa
=
г
R
le lle (Ele
=
&
alg
als
EEE
>
=
3
ele
El...
=
N
Ig
lg
Ё
Ig
5
=
я
=>
$
>
N
alg
>. | >
31%
=
oa
8
gli
32
|
lg $
=
[31513] 51358183
В alg
E
elslalg
EPs
a
2
=
1500
&
а
[=
lg
HEISE
So
ali
|
EN
0.22
a |
1500
0.33
me
Po
=
.
on
>
513 |588 |
S|5
=i
el
[
bd
in|
EPS
£1 2/8
=
Г м
=
o
8
o
$
ÉTÉ
E
0.47
o
=
RB
1000
0.56
58
С ОО
=
8
|| 5815
|8
E
—
го
—
ro
E
[=
=
>
A
EEE
En
ma
>|
|
>
|
=
=
НЕЕ
018/18
Bela]
»|8
31
==
un
=
Ra
32
|
lg
=—
on
=
|=
к
el8 lal:
=
FR
o
8
el8lal8|:
Е
O
я
AE
PE
O
il
=
Bel ll}
2
Я
lg] 28 [sl8|els|=l8|2l8[218
==
un
em
—
Po
Е :
BEEBE
=
ih
58| |8
37
Ig
=
Em
+
5
=
=
=
5
40
В ТТ
=
.
. ©
Я
un
=
3
06
5.
Bl
a
Er
Ml e
31
[2] Determination of R, —180mA adjustment—
Ш Measuring instruments:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101) or
Constant voltage D.C power supply (Model E-1 or E-2)
: Resistance selector (Model RS- IM)
: Digital tester (Type 2507)
: Battery adapter (2006-0415-75)
№ Standard value: 180+2mV
Ш Adjustment procedure
1. Disconnect R, as illustrated below. Connect lead wire for measurement to R, (terminals
(8, (9 of IC-1) and then set it on the measuring instrument.
Digital tester
y
oO 9 Of
TT =
2. Set power source voltage at 2.8V and metering switch (S:) to ON. Then select В.
resistance by the following method.
a. Change the range of Rp resistance selector to select Rp resistance where the digital
tester indicates around 180 mV.
b. From the obtained Rp resistance, select К. resistance which is proximate to 180 mV
from the table below. Then solder it to terminals (9, (9 of IC-1.
For example, when the resistance value of Rp | Comparison of
’ К. used (КП)
resistance selector is 18 КП, the value voltage (mV)
indicated on digital tester is to be V 18 (mV).| Vi 180+ 2 18
Resistance of Resistance | Indication of digital | Vis < 1805 V 30 18
selector (KN) tester (mV). У» <180EVu 22
18 Ув Vu < 1805 Ух 27
20 V» У» <180sV,„ 33
24 Va Vu <180<V 4, 39
30 Ух Va =180+2 47
36 Vs Va <I80S Vo 56
47 Vu Ve < 180 (CV 100 68
62 Ve Ve ((180< Уж 82
100 V 100 Ме = 180 + 2 100
200 V 200 V mo = 180 + 2 200
оо Vo V wo < 180((V co 200
У 200 ((180< V co 390
c. After soldering R, resistor, remove Rp resistance selector. Then make sure that
indication of digital tester is 180+ 2 mV.
(Ех.) When Rp resistance is 24КП, indication of digital tester is 175mV; and when Rp
is 30KN, the indication is 181 mV, Va = 175< 180< 181- У». Therefore, В. is 27
KN as obtained from the table.
[3] Adjustment of VR, —AUTO Shutter
speed adjustment—
Ш Measuring instruments:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101), or Digital time counter (TC-1) and
Constant voltage D.C power supply (Model E-1 or E-2).
: Luminescence box (L-222 or L-223)
: Standard lens (50 mm F 1. 4)
: ND filter (MINOLTA ND 50% FOR ADJUSTMENT)
: Battery adapter (2006-0415-75)
: Luminescence adjusting driver-B
Ш Standard value: 32~36ms
Luminescence= EV 10, ASA 100 (BV
F-number=F 5.6 (AV 5)
M Adjustment procedure
5), ASA sensitivity= 100 (SV 5)
1. Connect lead wires for measurement to terminal (0 (start signal) and @ (stop signal)
of ICı and then set it on the measuring instrument as
illustrated below.
Ref. Digital time counter (TC-1) and constant voltage D.C power supply setting.
« SEP-COM SW.: SEP
+ Trigger level Acc +1 EME TT
B-ch : +1 (Vv)!
* Trigger slope A-ch : +
B-ch : +
|
|
|
!
|
!
1
1
ü
1
'
* VOLTAGE : 28V N >
! f
_ --+ = ь
TC-1 1 4
8 ШИ! © = +-—="
8 38 00 mund
Vv A
E -1
| Do o® | |
LUMIMESCEMCE BOX
оо о, о
о 0 909 о
ww =
=
I
|
№ filter 4
'
r
|
!
1
|
i
|
i
|
|
|
|
|
|
1
|
|
I
|
1
1
|
:
= m
Luminescence
adjusting driver
Curtain
O - О ©
5 Еб 509000
“ + esssse
850° 6 5555
Battery adapter
Body and measuring instrument setting
e Body e Camera standard tester
* Shutter dial : AUTO . V-SEL : 2.8V
* ASA dial : 100 * TIME COUNT : ON
* EV correction scale : 0 * TRIG SLOPE START: +
*Mode SW. ON STOP : +
e Standard lens « TRIG TYPE : ON-OFF
* Distance ring ‚ м * MEAS-CAL : MEAS.
* F-number ‚ F5.6 * SS-X change : So
‚ ND filter : Attached e Luminance box
* Luminescence : EV 11 (ASA 100)
2. Make the adjustment by turning УК; so that counter
value (32~36ms) when shutter is released.
Turning VR; clockwise increases shutter speed.
3. Change Luminescence box to EV 15 (ASA 100), detach ND filter and release shutter. Then
indication is within the standard
make sure that shutter speed ranges from 0.95~1.7ms. (VR, should be shortcircuited).
If shutter speed is out of the range, adjust VR: wit
hin the specification in 2.
32
ju 4
33
[4] Adjustment of VR3 —Indication adjustment —
Ш Measuring instruments:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101) or Constant voltage D.C power supply (Model E-1 or
E-2)
: Luminescence box (L-222 or L-223)
: Standard lens (50mm, F 1. 4)
: Battery adapter (2006-0415-75)
* Luminescence adjusting driver-B
№ Standard value: . =1 |-0.5) 0 |+0.5/+1 |EV
(1) Luminescence : EV 11 ASA 100 (BV 6) CAM NM NR DR MR ®
ASA sensitivity: 100 (SV 5) } Indicates: A|O|O|F|O|O
F-number : F8 (AV 6) 51916661
(2) Luminescence : EV9 ASA 100 (BV 4) 8 | +: | ur Eu DE
ASA sensitivity: 100 (SV 5) } Indicates: | Ф | | |e
F-number : Fi (AV 7) | ооо хх
(3) Luminescence : EV 14 ASA 100 (BV 9) 1000 | +: | | ФФ] Ф
ASA sensitivity: 100 (SV 5) } Indicates: 500 | DEZE ||
F-number : 5.6 . (AVS) ¡NOOO IA |x
Ш Adjustment procedure
Arrange measuring instrument, set power source voltage to 2.8V, shutter dial (A) and metering
switch (Sı) to ON as illustrated below.
LIME SCRrMCE BOX
1. When luminescece box EV 11 (ASA 100) and standard |епз = Е 8: со, LED for standard
value (1) should light up. Make the adjustment by VR3. Turning VR; clockwise shifts the
indication upwards.
2. When luminescence box= EV 9 (ASA 100) and standard lens=F 11; ©, LED for standard
value (2) should light up. If the indication is out of the specification, check the indication
for EV 14 (ASA 100) and then make the adjustment by the following method or
3. When luminescence box= EV 14 (ASA 100) and standard lens—F 5.6: <, LED for standard
value (3) should light up. If the indication is out of the specification, make the adjustment
by the following method or
Ш Adjustment of siope
If LED is deflected as shown in A, change resistor (R,) to larger resistance.
If LED is deflected as shown in B, change resistor (R,) to smaller resistance.
A
Ш When К, is replaced, make the adjustment from the initial step. 125 x 1000
60 © :
30 -# 30
15 4 2
8 m 1
A
He à
34
Ш Manual sec. time adjustment
% This adjustment should be done after Auto exposure adjustment.
Ш Measuring instruments:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101) or Constant voltage D.C power supply (Model E-1 or
E-2)
: Shutter tester (Model FSID-MN 4 or S-2101)
: Battery adapter (2006-0415-75)
№ Standard value:
| Shutter speed | Reference value | Allowable value |
| 1/30 31.3 ms 30—33 ms |
| 1/1000 0. 98 ms 0.69~1.38ms |
NOTE: Allowable value stands for the center value of shutter tester. As for unevenness,
refer to Inspection Specifification.
№ Adjustment procedure
1. Arrange the measuring instrument and set the power source voltage to 2.8V as illustrated
ST-5101
2. Release shutter with shutter dial set at 1/30 and make the adjustment by VRı so that the
measured value is proximate to reference value (31.3ms). Turning VR, clockwise decreases
shutter speed.
Fast
3. Next, set shutter speed to 1/1000 and release shutter. Then make the adjustment by VR,
so that the measured value is proximate to reference value (0, 98 ms).
Turning VR, clockwise increases shutter speed.
4. Repeat the adjustments in (2) and (3).
* If manual sec. time is released or at high speeds, refer to the Trouble Shooting Chart. (Page. 16— 17) g |
35
MW AUTO exposure checking
Ш Measuring instruments:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101) or Constant voltage D.C power supply (Model E-1 or
E-2)
: Luminescence box (L-222 or L-223)
: EE tester (Model EE-2101 or EE-2111)
: Shutter tester (Model SD-2101)
: Standard lens (50 mm, F 1. 4)
: Power source adapter
Ш Standard value:
Measuring | 50-2101 | Shutter speed | EE level EE level
luminance | Aperture | allowable range | allowable range | variation
(ASA 100) | switch (ms) (EV) (EV)
EV15 0.58—1.71 Within
EV14 F 5.6 1.12—3.40 +0.8 EV 0.6 EV
EV9 35. 8~ 109
NOTE: When EE level measurement with luminescence EV 15 (ASA 100) causes over-range
mark to light up, shutter is not released. At that time, it is normal if EE level
requirement EV 14~EV 9 is satisfied.
Checking procedure
1. Arrange the measuring instrument as illustrated below.
EE-2101
LUMINESCENCE Goa
ST-5101
b—
er
Body and measuring instrument setting
e Body e Camera standard tester e EE tester
* Shutter dial . AUTO * V-SEL: 2.8V *K value dial : 1.2
lien scale | à o es meen J
+ Mode SW. - ON “EV: 15, 14. 9 e 50-2101
"Luminescence change SW.: Same as lumine-
scence box
* Diaphragm change SW. : F 5.6
2. Release shutter and make sure that shutter speed and EE level are within the standardvalue.
* If shutter speed and EE level are out of the standardvalue, make the adjustment of AUTO
exposure.
Ш Indicating LED checking and adjustment
Ш Measuring instruments:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101)
: Battery adapter (2006-0415-75)
№ Checking procedure
1. Disconnect two leads (green, blue) of CdS board and connect the lead wires to measuring
instrument, and then set the camera on the measuring instrument as illustrated.
or
36
_ e Body e ST-5101
* Speed dial: AUTO » V-SEL : 2.8V
* Mode SW.: ON « Mode SW. : LED
* Signal SW.: CdS
ST-5101 Power source voltage 2 8V
*
co Battery adapter
‚ Set metering switch (S,) to ON and turn ASA dial so that LED continuously lights up
from Y (under-range warning) to A (over-range warning).
3. Look into finder and make sure that indication is clear without vignetting of LED from
Y to 4,
4. If vignetting of LED exists in the view, make the adjustment according to the following
procedure.
Ш Adjustment procedure
1. With the above lead connections, loosen set-screws of LED board and shift it in the
direction of arrow as illustrated. Tighten the set-screws when the indication is evenly
clear and brightest from Y to A.
* When the adjustment is impossible, the position of
on pentagon holder side is defec-
tive. Refer to the Assembly Chart. (Page. 19)
Ш Touch switch operation checking
№ Measuring instruments:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101) or Constant voltage D.C power supply (Model E-1 or
E-2)
Battery adapter (2006-0415-75)
№ Standard value:
Indication is on with 10M, and off with 30MM.
Ш Checking procedure
|. Arrange measuring instrument as illustrated. Set shutter dial to (A) and power source
voltage to 2.8V,
31-5101
Cy — o Jo mos: +0
il CFO 1909000
т ER 2222 ©
$$$’ * eeecece:
| ==
2)
+
= Battery adapter
2. Touch the switch (not pressing) and make sure that indication lights up.
«If it doesn't light up, moisten the finger.
+ If it still doesn't light up. push shutter button until metering switch (S,) is activated.
At that time, if indication lights up, touch switch and S, contact are defective and if it
doesn't light up, refer to the Trouble Shooting Chart. (Page. 13)
Ex
37
Ш Over-range lock checking
Ш Measuring instruments:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101) or Constant voltage D.C power supply (Model E-1 or
E-2)
: Luminescence box (L-222 or L-223)
: Battery adapter (2006-0415-17)
№ Standard value:
i r
ee : EV 15 (ASA 100) (BV 10) Releasing should be impossible with A
ASA sensitivity : 250 (SV 6. 25) (over-range) lighted
F-number : FS.6 (AV 5) |
2) Luminescence : EV 14 (ASA 100) (BV9) Releasing should’ be possible with à
ASA sensitivity : 125 (SV 5. 25) ¡
(over-range) off.
F-number : F5.6 (AV 5)
Ш Checking procedure
1. Arrange the measuring instrument and set the power source voltage tu 2.8V and shutter
dial to (A).
LUMINESCENCE BOX с ST-5101
= urtaın —
Jo; = = | À + + à Tis)
"iO a Е + "$ A
i. ROSE |
—W
: Y eeceoce
T Battery adapter ÿ >
2. When luminescence box= EV 15 (ASA 100), standard lens= F 5.6: ow, and ASA sensitivity =
250, releasing should be impossible with A (over-range) lighted.
3. When luminescece box= EV 14 (ASA 100). standard lens= F 5.6: as, and ASA sensitivity:
125, releasing should be possible with A lover-range) off.
* If the above requirements are nut satisfied, the adjustment of УК, (indication adjustment |
is wrong. Refer to the adjustment of VR,. (Page. 33)
Ш Magnetic release minimum operation voltage and release lock voltage
checking
Ш Measuring instruments:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101) or Constant voltage П.С power supply (Model E-1 or
Е-2)
Battery adapter
Ш Standard value:
Shutter should not operate at 1.75V but at 2 15V.
Ш Checking procedure
|. Arrange the measuring instrument as illustrated below and set power source voltage tu
1. 75V. At that time, shutter should not become released.
ST-5101
f J: MP os » ef)
O i o yn $ de
L
O
T Baltery adapter
2 With the connections kept as they are, set power source voltage to 2. 15V, once set body
mode swith to OFF and again to ON.
Subsequent shutter releasing should be possible.
+ When shutter releasing is impossible with power source voltage set at 2.15V, and С, (100 uF)
as illustrated below and do checking as in 2.
If shutter is not released with C, added, or if shutter releasing is possible at 1.75V,
ааа magnet (Mg.2) or circuit board is defective, repair it with reference to Trouble
Shooting Chart. (Page. 15)
MW B.C lamp lighting voltage checking
@ Measuring instruments: |
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101) or Constant voltage power supply (Model E-1 or E-2)
: Battery adapter (2006-0415-75)
№ Standard value:
Lamp is offat 1.85V, and on at 2.15V (at 25°C room temperature)
Ш Checking procedure
Arrange the measuring instrument as illustrated below. Set power source voltage to 1. 85V,
and B.C switch to ON (in the direction of arrow). Then make sure the lamp is off.
Similarly, set power source voltage to 2. 15V, then make sure B.C lamp is lighted.
«If B.C lamp doesn't turn on, refer to Trouble Shooting Chart. (Page. 11)
B.C switch ON — &
a Battery adapter
rn
ale
ana
CE El ©;
de
15
39
Ш Indicating LED minimum lighting voltage checking
Ш Measuring instruments:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101) or Constant voltage power supply (Model E-1 or E-2)
: Battery adapter (2006-0415-75)
№ Standard value:
LED should light up at 2.0V in darkness.
Checking procedure
Arrange the measuring instrument as illustrated below. Set power source voltage to г. OV,
shutter dial to (A), and release switch (Sı) to ON, with light shielded, indicating LED (V)
should then light up.
+
7 Battery adapter
Ш Self-timer operation checking
Ш Measuring instruments:
Camera standard tester (ST-5101) or Constant voltage D.C power supply (Model E-1 or
E72)
Battery adapter (2006-0415-75)
№ Standard value:
After releasing shutter button, self-timer lamp should start blinking within 1 sec., and blink-
ing cycle should change before releasing. Shutter should be released in 6—15 sec. after
releasing shutter button,
Ш Measuring procedure
Arrange the measuring instrument as illustrated below. Set power source voltage to 2. 8V,
mode switch to "SELF TIMER" and shutter dial to MANUAL (except B), the specification
should be satisfied.
Hp
SELF TIMER T
Switch ON T Batiery adapter
* If self-timer fails to operate, refer to Trouble Shooting Chart (Page. 18)
If self-timer operates but shutter is not released. refer to Trouble Shooting Chart (Page. 18)
‚oo
M Minimum operation voltage checking
№ Measuring instruments:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101) or Constant voltage D.C power supply (Model E-1 or
E-2)
: Shutter tester (Model FS1D-MN4 or S-2101)
: Battery adapter (2006-04 15-75)
№ Standard value:
With voltage at 2.25V and 2.8V, shutter speed 1/1000 should be 0. 69—1. 38 ms.
(2, 15V
Ш Checking procedure
0. 60—1. 45 ms )
Arrange the measuring instrument as illustrated below. Set shutter dial to (1/1000), and
release the shutter at 2,8V and 2.25V respectively, thus measure the shutter speeds.
At that time, make sure that shutter speeds are within the specification (0.69~1.38 ms).
O
nh Es PA
Per,
* If the measured speeds are out of the standard value, re-adjust shutter speed or check
shutter. (Refer to Page. 49) |
Ш Synchro time lag checking
Ш Measuring instruments:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101) or Constant voltage power supply (Model E-1 or E-2)
: Shutter tester (Model FS1D-MN4 or S-2101)
: Battery adapter (2006-0415-75)
№ Standard value:
Shutter speed
1/60
Range A
0.3 ms or over
Range B
2 ms or over
№ Checking procedure
Arrange the measuring instrument as illustrated. Set shutter speed to 1/60, shutter tester to
“FUNCTION”, power source voltage to 2. 8V.
Then release the shutter and make sure the measured value is within the standard value.
* When the measured value is out of the standard value, check and adjust the shutter. (Refer
to Page. 51)
40
41
Ш Strobe function checking
[1] Checks before completion of charge
№ Measuring instruments:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101) or Constant voltage D.C power supply (Model E-1 or
E-2)
Standard value:
Ma Indication in finder Release shutter
0 AUTO speed Operation at speed matched with AUTO speed.
1.6 Indication is off. Shutter is released. 2nd curtain runs with power off.
2.0 “60” LED is on. Shutter is released. 2nd curtain runs with power off.
№ Checking procedure
1. Arrange the measuring instrument as illustrated below. Set shutter dial to (A) and power
source voltage to 0~2.0V, then check the measured value. (Battery is to be used for
power supply to the camera. )
* If the operation is wrong, refer to Trouble Shooting Chart (Page. 19).
2 Checks on completion of charge
Ш Measuring instruments:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101) or Constant voltage D.C power supply (Model E-1 or
E=2)
| Shutter tester (Model FSID-MN4 or S-2101)
Exclusive strobo (8668)
Battery adapter (2006-0415-75)
М Standard value:
“60” LED should blink on completion of strobo charge. Shutter speed should change to 20 ms
(17 — 23 ms)
BChecking procedure
1. Mount exclusive strobo (8668) on camera, set shutter speed to (A) and metering switch
(Si) to ON to charge the strobo.
Auto speed should be indicated until completion of charge, and “60” LED should blink while
the other indications are off on completion of charge (Ne tube is on).
2. Arrange the measuring instruments as illustrated right. Set shutter speed to 1/1000 and
release shutter on completion of strobo charge, then make sure the measured value is
within the specification (17~23 ms). (Light should be shut out to prevent shutter tester
from the light of strobo. )
Е ST-5101
а ав
* If strobo doesn't operate properly, do the checks before completion of charge. If the results
of above checks are satisfactory, the connector contact or strobo (8668) are defective.
(Refer to the instructions for strobo. )
42
q
43
Ш Body back (В.В) adjustment
№ Measuring instruments:
: Body back adjusting standard gauge (43. 70 mm)
: Parallel soureface flat plate (for 2005)
: Dial gauge
: Battery
: Temporary nuts (2006-3309-75)
Ш Standard valve
43. 70+0. 01 mm
№ Adjustment procedure
1:
Standard gauge (43 70 mm)
Adjustment of pressure plate contacts.
Place parallel sourface flat plate on body pressure plate contacts and lightly push the
arrow-marked part with fingers to check for clearance.
Adjust the level by tapping the place using a fiber cushion.
Pressure plate contact
. Body back measurement
Set shutter dial to “В” and self-timer change contact holder to “ON” then release the
shutter and put parallel gauge on pressure plate contact. Check zero position of dial gauge.
using standard gauge. Slide the dial gauge up and down, right and left, and diagonally, then
measure body back.
Sel to “0”
Dial gauge
Parallel gauge
Direction arrow
. Body back adjustment
When measured value is lower than specification:
adjust it by 4 types of washer for adjustment.
Refer to the following table:
Type 2005- 1061-81 | 2005-1062-81 | 2005-1063-81
Thickness (mm) 0. 02 0.05 0.1
When measured value is higher than specification:
replace with bayonet lens mount (2005-1010-81) and also make the adjustment with use of
adjusting washers,
Elf body is greatly deviated, check for cracks in front plate and body. NO
48
Ш Finder back adjustment
Ш Measuring instruments:
: 1000 mm collimator (Medel RC-1000 I, J. Ш)
: Master lens for 054 finder-back adjustment (054-5202-79)
: Magnifier (8213-007)
Ш Standard value: 43. 56+0. 025 mm
Ш Adjustment procedure
1. Place the body in such a position that chart image is visible as illustrated below. Set the
magnigier visibility to the chart image.
Micro split
Chart №. 5 fensa
a ee | uN
Er \
Collimator chart image Standard lens
¡Chart No.5, C chart)
1000 mm collimator
2. With white line of standard lens matched, evenly move pint adjust screw up and down, when
vertical line of chart image has become matched, lock the screw.
Pint adjust screw
À | \. В excessive У. В insufficient
© у > <», ———<> >
al LY | | |
hs Yellow Green Yellow Green White
0.02 0 10. 02
43. 54 43. 56 43. 58
3. After adjustment, operate mirror several times, rotate helicoid of standard lens, and when
vertical line of chart image has become matched, check that the value is within the stan-
dard value (43.56+0.025mm) without one-side vignette.
When standard lens vs matched with white line
e Adjust screw should be evenly tumed.
insufficient Excessive
) Adjust screw turning direction
\ 5
(ll
45
Ш Top cover assembly
9613-1651-02 (x 4)
1061
P + Do not bend or stain metal-plated contact on arrow-marked side.
|
|
| 91128 M Fig. 20 4017 SP setting
018
Bond G17
—
= р
4017
\ot
[5] Top cover Bottom cover Outer finish
Ш Mount temporary top cover (2006-1003-75) before mounting top cover, hold lead wires and check
contact intervals, etc. a)
|
tt
2 &n 2006-2020-75 Rewind handle set
| oo xe
nn | Rewind handle
+ Fit projection in groove +
ol ASA brush holder. |
+ Mount it with speed | Shutter dial plate
dial set at AUTO, ; 2310
3307
«+ Fit it’ on dashed-line part. № в, [T]# 2005-3310-75
Adjust ASA indication by 2005 ( ¢ , Y |
beinding in the direction 4 |
of arrow.
2014 :
[6] #335
[т] # 2006-3003-75 „ [aloes | | Fit back side
fe EN 9758-0200-00 © projection in
хоз = | ao
| 4016 Y |
|
Winding lever set.
$111 (x 2) |
En ы ss, Е —
"ER
| 2, =
2 №. =
A En €
] =. ь a Ca :
al
X -
[G] #335 une dial > : | Y Top cover set
[+ 2006-2310-75 u EIDAGA
3013 PE Е | = >> 2} Ä |
a oS SS ae 7
L < = TC. |
55 |. | % Do not bend or stain brush
| Y Eyepiece frame |
д |
» 0440 |
SP
5 9110 (=x 2)
- Winding lever
9693 -1750-01 (x 2]
Bottom cover
E Battery case
46
47
Shutter performance checking
№ Checking items
Magnetic attraction and magnetic piece over-range volume.
. Curtain speed.
Manual sec. time.
. Minimum operation voltage.
Curtain bound.
. Synchro time lag.
Ш When checking before mounting body:
Ш When checking after completion of body:
|.
2
3.
4.
Shift winding bearing (0310) of body for shutter block adjustment (2006-0101-75) in the
direction of arrow, and set eccentric screw (9281) of shutter charge gear D (0350) in the
position as illustrated below.
. Mount shutter block on front frame of adjusting body and shift front frame towards body
winding side,
Shift winding bearing (0310) in the direction opposite to the arrow so that (—) of charge
gear A (2105) is engaged with shutter charge gear C (3016) as illustrated below.
Then tighten up set-screws.
. When winding is slowly done to greatly move 2nd curtain stop lever (0219) in the direction
of arrow. Make the adjustment so that sprocket idle gear (3034) is over-charged by 1
tooth from control base plate (0202) thus completing winding after shutter charge completion.
Carry out checking in the above order.
Remove top cover, and mount winding lever and shutter dial section.
Disconnect shutter control magnet + side (red), — side (brown), trigger switch + side
(violet), — side (black) lead wires from flexible circuit board.
load the batter box with battery (to operate release magnet).
Set shutter dial to other point than AUTO (to prevent release locking).
Carry out checking in the above order.
МЕ i ¿Mg ie |
Black Red
Trigger 1 Violet Brown Trigger (+1
Ш Precautions for measurement
If high speed operation or speed
change occurs when the shutter
connected to the measuring instru-
ment is released, release the shutter
with the MEAS-CAL switch set to
either “CAL” or “MEAS”.
48
[1] Magnetic attrction and magnetic piece over-range volume checking
Ш Measuring instrument: Camera standard tester (ST-5101)
№ Standard value: No high speed operation at 1. 5V.
1. Connect the measuring instrument and shutter as illustrated below. Make the setting of
the tester as follows.
2. High speed operation should not result when shutter is released.
. If high speed operation results, refer to Shutter performance adjustment.
Black
ШСТ-5101
V-SEL: 1.5% MEAS-CAL: MEAS
SS-SEL: 1 sec Mode-SW.: SS CHECK
55-Х: 55
TRIG TYPE ON-OFF, OFF-ON: ON-OFF
[2] Curtain speed checking
Ш Measuring instruments:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101)
: Shutter tester (Model FSID-MN4 or S-2101)
Ш Standard valve: 11.0+0.2ms (standard value) and 13ms or less (allowable value) for both 1
st and 2nd curtains.
1. Connect the measuring instrument and shutter block as illustrated below. Make the sett-
ing of the tester as follows.
É,
When shutter is released, both curtain speeds should be same within the specification.
* If the speeds are out of specification, refer to Shutter performance.
Biack
№ Shutter tester @ ST-5101
FUNCTION: RUN-T V-SEL: 2.8V
SS-SEL:_ 1/1000
SS-X: SS
TRIG TYPE
ON-OFF, OFF-ON: ON-OFF
MEAS-CAL: MEAS
Mode-SW.: SS CHECK
|6 2
49
[3] Manual sec. time checking
№ Measuring instruments:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101)
: Shutter tester (Model FS1D-MN4 or S-2101)
№ Standard value:
Shutter speed | Standard Allowable
1/1000 0.98 ms 0.7~1.34ms | +0.45EV
1/30 31.3ms | 26.3—37. 2 ms
L25EV
1/1 1000 ms 841~1190 ms =a
1. Connect the measuring instrument and shutter block as illustrated below. Make the setting |
of the tester as follows.
2. When shutter is released at each speed with SS-SEL switch of camera standard tester
set 1/1000, 1/30 and 1/1, the indication of shutter tester should be within the specification.
* If the results are out of the specification, refer to Shutter performance adjustment.
Black
M Shutter tester
FUNCTION: EXP. T
MW sT-5101
V-SEL: 2.8V
SS-SEL: 1/1000, 1/30, I see
SS-X: SS
4) Minimum operation voltage checking
Ш Measuring instruments:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101)
TRIG TYPE
ON-OFF, OFF-ON: ON-OFF
MEAS-CAL: MEAS
Mode-SW.: SS CHECK
Ш Standard value: Difference in shutter speed between power source voltages 2.8V and 1.85V
should be within 0.4 ms.
1. Connect the measuring instrument and shutter block as illustrated right. Make setting of
the tester as follows.
2. Set V-SEL switch of camera standard tester to 2.8V, release the shutter and read the
indication of shutter tester.
3. Next, set the V-SEL switch to 1.85V, release the shutter. Then. difference between the
indication and the reading in 2 should be within 0. 4 ms.
"If the results are out of the specification, refer to shutter performance adjustment.
50
+ —{}—
ST-5101
Black
р A E Shutter tester
4 0) FUNCTION: EXP. T
é Ш 51-5101
V-SEL: 2.8, 1.85 TRIG TYPE
O ER SS-SEL: 1/1000 ON-OFF, OFF-ON: ON-OFF
SS-X: SS MEAS-CAL: MEAS
Mode-SW.: SS CHECK
[5] Curtain bound checking
Ш Measuring instruments:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101)
: Shutter tester (Model FSID-MN4 or S-2101)
Ш Standard value: No bound in the view.
1. Connect the measuring instrument and shutter block as illustrated below. Make the setting
of tester as follows.
2. When shutter is released, no bound should be observed.
* If any bound is observed, refer to shutter performance adjustment.
Black
+
р р Ш Shutter tester
5 FUNCTION: BOUND-T
Ш ST-510)
| O Rap V-SEL: 2.8V MEAS-CAL: MEAS
D SS-SEL: 1/125 Mode-SW.: SS CHECK
w w SS-X: SS
TRIG TYPE
ON-OFF, OFF-ON: ON-OFF
[6] Synchro time lag checking
№ Measuring instruments:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101)
: Shutter tester (Model FSID-MN4 or S-2101)
M Standard value: | Shutter speed Allowable time lag |
| 1/60 Range А | 0.3ms or over |
Range В | 2.0ms or over |
l. Connect the measuring instrument and shutter block as illustrated below. Make thesetting
of tester as follows. When checking complete body shutter block, connect synchro terminal
ans shutter tester.
2. When shutter is released, indications in ranges A and B should be within the specification.
* If the results are out of the specification, refer to Shutter performance adjustment.
Black
№ Shutter tester
O ASA FUNCTION: X
Green ”
ШЗТ-5101
V-SEL: 2.8V
SS-SEL: 1/60
SS-X: SS
TRIG TYPE
ON-OFF, OFF-ON: ON-OFF
MEAS-CAL: MEAS
Mode-SW: SS CHECK
Trouble Shooting Chart
|1. Hints on use of Trouble Shooting Chart
1:
Le
This chart includes the symptoms end causes of troubles on the camera side.
Even when a symptom appears on the camera side, the trouble is not always on the
camera side but in connection with the replacement lens, winder or exclusive strobo.
Therefore, carefully check operations related to the auxiliary parts before using this
chart.
2. Contents of Chart
. Mentioned in this chart are only individual patterns and these cannot cover all possible
causes.
Regarding multiple causes, carry out an all-round investigation of the trouble.
. The chart mainly covers electrical causes and to a certain extent mechanical causes.
3. Precautions for Work
1.
A digital tester (2507) is to be used as the measuring instrument. It is also allowable
to use other measuring instruments when the input impedance exceeds 10МП.
. Use the measuring instrument to check voltages, and a tester of less than 3V to check
current conduction.
. It can be safely said that troubles of electric parts such as IC's diodes, transistors,
resistors, capacitors, etc. seldom occur. It is therefore practical to put emphasis on
checking for defective soldering of lead wires and electric parts, defective switches,
etc.
- When checking for defective soldering, do not excessively press the parts or pull the
lead wires.
. When measuring voltage. attach a pin to the end of alligator clip because the portion
measured is very narrow. Do not directly connect the alligator clip with the portion
measured; otherwise damge to the electric parts or to the pattern may occur.
- When measuring the switch operation pattern, take care not to scratch the pattern
outside the switch operation range. In case of a switch contact, take care not to
disturb the switch contact.
. When removing electric parts, pull out the power supply cord.
. The desirable soldering iron temperature is about 260~300°C. In any case, finish
soldering in a few seconds. Be sure to remove chips before soldering.
4. How to use the Trouble Shooting Chart
The chart includes check points in detail ranging from the appearance of symptoms to
the finding of causes.
. The flexible circuit board should be normal.
. The voltage at each check point is to be the normal voltage when SW.1 and SW.7 are |
set to ON with winding completed (before releasing), 3.0V power supply (constant
voltage), and 1/30 AUTO.
. The earth is not connected to the body, check the earth on the flexible circuit board.
. The indications in the Trouble Shooting Chart are tom], (Symptom to be checked),
¡Check point! . Normal voltage at check point] . Defective volta . [Possible cause],
[Probable cause], and the marks in circles stand for check points in the flexible circuit
board and circuit diagram.
5. Battery capacity checking method
1.
. The battery is normal if: the measured
Connect the 1000 resistor to the battery
as illustrated. Also, connect a digital
tester or voltmeter in parallel with the |
resistor and then measure the volsage, E) НИИ TER
The measurement should be done in a 1001 or Voltmeter
short time to avoid excessive consumption Battery
of battery power. |
voltage is over 1. 4V.
17
"00115 2^151[2хэ YIM ‘295 ()9/] 01 3Huey) 1,изэор paads 2211745 : Z %
'0q0115 2AISN(2X2 YPIM WOIPWIIPUI ON : | ж
ещо} sa ¡TON uado day sa шок wado 142 sa pare] on | 02
con EE mer CIA UE ПО Е re] oi mule
[HON sa [tuo y 23142 on 531 ещо aduay> oy sa Bun on | gl
LL HET sa [ramon wado ida y sai [tion uado ıday sal paid on | /1
ION | zul, reino И Resi aan sau jewson Fe ic 531 ¡ruso y | 9]
шок | „41° nn jewion ns os sa ешо und ains, sau jewson | cy
jemsoy ON es 10N ON ums ИН ON эш ype ve м, | py
ещо sa [LION] ещо sa шок jewsoy sau (La) jemoy | cy
CI mx raion] ae womans | в rey] wars в xls
jemson sa jewson a ja sa jewion м aa sa ещо | ||
jtwion sa} N | es o's jaa sa‘ ещо HR de “sabe sa jewson | 0]
ок - ON uns юм oN 1181S JON ON jewson | 6
jtwlon fa, jewion (2%) jewion 191 jewson (2m) jrwioy 531 (138) soy] y
jewioy sal ешо jewion sa RS JOY ON ami) [je € e /
шок say ¡uo A] jewson say jewson; pes line $24 3104 241 uo wor] | y
[TIO N sa [TULIO N Bo ities CENT jewson hel Repeats 51 ¡ruso y; | с
jewion | sal jewson uado ida y sah Puso uado ¡day Sal paiydıl ON |
шок] sa jewson ats re es sa 11915 JON ON au | A | €
що sa ещо Pike pd $a) JIBS jou ON sun jew We |2
("SON sa‘ jewsoy agnsun| sa les 104 ON | ue de D ES
¡01 96 paads ¿anys | eseajoy sawn) 125 paads sainys =| aseajay моцезры
2 8 qina
jenuew olny
53221405 5| элзэа}эр о} INP SANO] Jo ISIT] 9
'j812do ] USIOP 12puIM OINY уж
MO] 51 Кутзее {121109 uaym Ajuo Buiquiyg : Ex
ищо sa ¡pao y wado ida y sa [puso y uado 1d y LEE | paul on | 21
EN | Au oats wun] rs] E coer ES ET waren | |
[Puso y sal [HELIO N [Puso y sa jewion jewson sal ¡uso |oı (pa)
шло ON porjesipul jug on woryeaıpuı Aug) ON "шо | 6
jewioy ON worywaipur {м0 ON воетри! Ajug ON [TON g
еще ON воры! 90 ON 01ye31put Ajay ON jewson | ;
jemion ON uns ON oN uns si ON won | y
[tION ON Jans PN ON 14435 JON ON jemson | ç
jemuon ON Jans JON ON ums юн ON [YEJON | y
sun LEZ ло uado 2 sa ("mon wado 1da y so) para] on | г
mon ON ums юм ON ms ION ON pad ON | z
jemson, #94 мон uado 142} sa Burquiyg 190 uado day sa pays) ом || p-21
jemioy ON (Pava ¡91 ue SV) oN 259212 ae Stay) ON msn | (1
pardi] on a) ло jrwioy sal [mon jewioy 591 jemion | ¢
jemson oN wore2ips! 4190 oN Ue eases tite ON jrmson | $
[LION sa} 2001) dejap on "що sal EA oído on ешо sa} je@son | ;
[ELO N 531 amı) Átjap on jrwion 531 aw) Ámap on ещо К 531 jemioy | 9
parqaiy on sa) parqdi] on [ton sa paryin on шок 531 ¡uso | с
ешо sa Surqutig you 037 [Faron sa Surqui[g 109 (37 won sa [SiON | y
jemsony 21 (Em) Iron [tao y 531 (gg) jewioy jrwson 53) jewioy | €
лок #1 imei an pecan qua] 54 A ci a] sr ¡rason | 7
[VILO N ON ums 10N ON 14815 10N oN Мом т E-JI
sewn 195 poods smjnys | eseajey sown les paads зецпцс | aseajay uot] e3pul
2 8 are
¡ENUB A] any
117 à
List of troubles due to electrical parts and switches
Defective contacts
Shortcircuit troubles
Both AUTO and MANUAL "released.
Both AUTO and MANUAL released.
release button is released,
Ca (curtain is kept open) (curtain is kept open)
с Both AUTO and MANUAL high speed. Both AUTO and MANUAL "released.
(curtain doesn't open) (curtain is kept open)
с Variation occurs due to shutter operation at high Both AUTO and MANUAL:--high speed.
* | speeds. (curtain doesn't open)
С. Self-timer turns.off without blinking. Self-timer turns off without lighting.
с Self-timer doesn't work, Shutter lock and self-timer do not operate in auto
and manual.
Ci Magnetic release doesn’t operate. Magnetic release doesn't operate.
с Metering circuit oscillates and indication unstable. Both AUTO and MANUAL---released.
| (curtain is kept open)
с Self-timer blinks but doesn't turn off. Shorteireuit occurs during metering indication, and
* | Long sec. time is elongated. battery is exhausted too quickly.
VRı | MANUAL released. (curtain is kept open) MANUAL*--high speed. (curtain doesn't open)
*/ lights up at all times in Auto. Auto sec. time is long and cannot be adjusted.
VR: Me À
It cannot be adjusted.
VR “OF lights up at all times in Auto. Auto indication is set to low speed side, and sec.
> time is not affected,
VR. | AUTO and MANUAL---high speed. Sec. time is long at high speed.
Ri |EE linearity change great. No low speed sec. time.
Rz | Auto released. (curtain is kept open) Auto high speed sec. time tends to become long.
R Both AUTO and MANUAL: released. Sec. time is long on the whole.
= (curtain is kept open)
R Due to 180mV deflection, manual linearity and ASA Sec. time is short on the whole.
: changeover defective.
E Shutter lock level unstable when battery capacity Shutter lock level becomes high.
: low.
Ra | Self-timer doesn't turn off while lighted. Self-timer doesn't work.
К; ВС, self-timer not lighted. LD 13 is too bright.
R Over-range indication deflected upwards and under- Over-range indication deflected downwards and under-
" range indication downwards. range indication upwards.
Rs Indicating LED doesn't light up. Indicating LED is too bright.
R BC. lighting voltage and shutter lock level sometimes | Shortcircuit lamp doesn't light up at BC.
'* | ¡nversed.
TR Even when *A* is lighted, shutter is operated as Magnetic release doesn't operate.
Self-timer doesn't operate.
Operation Kept at ON Kept at OFF
$; | Metering SW. | Indication stays lighted. Indication doesn't light up.
5, | Release SW. Shutter is operated with winding lever shifted | Self, magnetic release do not operate.
back.
Sa | Trigger SW. AUTO, MANUAL released. AUTO A ira ee rT
5. | Reset SW. Magnetic release doesn't operate. Magnetic release doesn't operate.
5; | Bulb SW. No Bulb (B). AUTO A MANUAL:-:B at all times.
= B.C SW. BC lighted at all times. B.C doesn't light up.
Self SW. Self is activated at all times. Self doesn't work.
Sr | Main SW. No operation at all.
s, lam sw. AUTO released (at AUTO), MANUAL release
(at MAN.)
Ss | TV SW. MANUAL released.
S | SV SW. AUTO released.
S 16 | AV SW. Shutter lock at AUTO, high speed at MAN,
Su | Touch SW. Indication stays lighted. Indication doesn't light up.
(ON with below 10MM)
(OFF with over 30MM)
115
8. Voltage at main check points of electric circuits
Power source voltage: 3 volts
Camera condition Auto
Winding completed | During metering | During exposure |Exposure completed Remarks
mar
S, ON S, ON Sı ON Si, 5: ON
IC- 1 Е 2.9% Power source (+) of metering and
1 | calculating circuit.
2 Е 0.75 Output of metering circuit
3 F 1,2 0.1 1.2 Related to IC-1 @
4 Е 28 Power source for memory, indication
level.
5 F 1.25 0.1 1.25 Output to memory condenser
6 F 1.25 0.1 1.25 Output to indication circuit
7 F 1.25 To IC-2 @
8 F Input of strobo auto signal
g F 0 0.1 0.7 Related to S:
10 0 1.3 F Related to 5;
11 F 3 —2.2— 0 F Charging voltage of C;
12 F 0.6 0.1 0.6 Memory voltage
Жа * 0. 8 0.8 |
13 ых ий
F (1.7) F (1.7) Related to blinking of LED “60
14 0 Power source (—) of 1C-1
15 3.0 0.1 3.0 Output to 2nd curtain control Mg.
16 F 2.95 F Power source (+) of control circuit
17 F 2.8 Input of photo tube changer
% b 0.7
18 F (0.55) Power source (—) of calculating circuit
% с 0.9
19 Е (0.75) Power source (+) of calculating circuit
m do р 0.8 |
(0.65) Related to TV information 5,
F—no voltage indication (indicated value is unstable. )
Parenthesized in Жа, b. с, d are voltages at manual 1/30,
K-marked in #a are 0.2V with LED “60” lighted. Me wi oy ee
Ke, Г. g are as figures when self-timer is operated. 2.0V
Winding completed | During metering | During exposure |Exposure completed Remarks
Sa ON Sı ON S: ON Si, S» ON
> 2.95 Е Power source (+) of released circuit.
2 3 2.95 0.2 0.7 Related to power source self-maintenance
and to SS.
3 0.7 F Related to release lock
Ke Related to oscillator circuit for self-
timer.
u LED blinking signal output for BC,
5 1.6 :
self-timer.
* Es 11 F Switched to self-timer cireuit, related
to Se.
7 2.3 F Related to release delay, self-timer
8 3.0 2.95 0 2.95 Magnetic release output
9 B.C circuit output
10 Power source (—) of IC-3
Br Power source (—) of 1C-4
2 3.0 Power source (+) of 1C-4
3 2.6 0 Input of Si. Su
4 3.0 2.95 0.2 0.7 Input of S:
5 3.0 F Release circuit input related to 5.
2.95 F To IC-3 ®
7 0.7 3.0 Charging voltage of С.
8 3.0 2.95 0 2.95 То 1C-3 ®
9 3.0 0 Output to release Mg
10 2.0 F To winder terminal related to 5.
11 2.95 Е То IC-1 ®
12 F 2.95 To IC-1 Ф
\7!
Trouble Items
A.
B.
*
-zonmnmon
= PA a
2
р
Self-timer operation indicating LED (for B.C) does not light up. “=““""""""" ÓN
(No operation at all) |
(Neither BC nor self-timer light up.)
(Only self-timer does not. light up.)
(Neither self-timer nor magnetic release operate.)
(Only self-timer does not operate. It turns off immediately.)
B.C lighting voltage is defective. "meet
Self-timer operation indicating LED (for B.C.) is too bright. een
Indicating LED does not light up. dda ueeecedeedscceececcenscececececessnnassanacencnsnescssseeeseuseeenesans
LY (over-range warning) is kept lighted. II
Indicating LED flickers during operation of ASA dial. “seen emmm.
Indicating LED flickers during operation of diaphragm ring. "ee" cnn.
Indication does not change even when diaphragm ring is operated, nen
- Meter sensitivity is defective. RR O AAA
Indicating LED is too bright. CRASS Teese ASA
Indicating LED 15 dark or incomplete. ee ee LL
Indicating LED partially fails to light up. PTTTPTPPTTCTErrrrrrerir cirri EL ECL CELL LL
Magnetic release does not operate. ARRETE TTC EEE CE CE CET rr LL
Release can be done by release button even when Ly (over-range warning) :
is lighted. eer rr OO 8 8 6 DS SE RS нии SRE они ии ини ина SR TR RS SSSR SRE RSS RSR ess Ssssss
Shutter speed 15 defective. PET PE OL CL TC prisa наани
1. Auto, manual and bulb are all at high speeds. (curtain doesn't open)
2. AUTO and MANUAL high speed. (curtain doesn't open)
3. AUTO and MANUAL + -curtain is kept open.
4. AUTO and MANUAL - + short in sec. time.
5. AUTO and MANUAL long in high speed sec. time.
6. AUTO and MANUAL ++********""**long in sec. time on the whole.
7. Only MANUAL------high speed. (curtain doesn't open)
8. Only MANUAL curtain is kept open.
9. Only AUTO: +++ ++ curtain is kept open.
10. No bulb.
P. 11-12
P.16-17
яя
ыы
. Self-timer does not operate at all. -*--
Self-timer turns off too soon.
Self-timer works while self-timer operation indicating LED is on.
Self-timer works is off.
Shutter is not released while is blinking.
. Self-timer is normal while shutter button is depressed.
nm: > Pd is
$ $ OS «
TEPC ITC Pee Ee 2 2
Strobo does not flash. -
Indicating LED is not switched.to “60” with the exclusive strobo’ нее
Speed is not switched to 1/60 with the exclusive strobo. *******"""*="""
Curtain is kept open with the exclusive strobo mounted.
Curtain is kept open by remote control.
Winder does not operate.
DUO Vv UU
Battery is exhausted too early.
light up.
Г Check battery capacity,
A|LED for self-timer operation | (One or both LED fail to light up.)
(for B.C indication) doesn't
(To call LED for self-timer and B.C at the same time
LD)
~ no
a E AA ae
YE
Indication
finder lights up.
№ 1
YES
LED for
B. €
O
“| LED for No operation
B.C lights up at all
YES
Check voltage
(3V) at pattern
De and Wa.
YES
„|
>|
Replace battery |
Check voltage
(3V) at patte
Qe and He.
NO
Pattern DW and LED
board soldering
defective.
YES
Battery box defective,
worn out, contact and
board soldering
defective, lead wire
(red) burnt out.
Sr (mode SW.)
contact defective.
Pattern @ and LED
board soldering
defective.
lights up.
YES
9
See Page. 12
LED for self-
timer operation
lights up.
NO
(Neither B.C
nor self-timer
(Only B.C d
YES
Check voltage |
3V)
at k+ and h- м
Кь.
YES
light up.)
oesn't light up.)
NO
IC4 @ soldering
defective.
S, (Reset SW.)
contact defective.
[LD lights “up when |
| voltage (1.8V) is Ino
|
mae]
applied to pattern
LD defective. Lead or
Mg wiring board
soldering defective.
— _ {YES
Tip lights up when |
ta)
voltage (1.8\) is [NO :
Е В, solderin defective.|
| applied to pattern | à ‚ne
ee aon
YES
1C3 ©. ® soldering
defective.
|
1C 3 defective. |
Pattern k and LED
board soldering
defective.
|
1C3 @ and @
shortcircuited.
5, (В.С SW.) contact
defective.
—
R ic shortcircuited. |
IC 3 ©) soldering
defective.
IC 3 defective. |
|
When released in self,
self-timer doesn't
work but shutter is
operated,
NO Neither self-timer nor \
| $: (Release Sw.)
magnetic release operate. /
YES
|
\
Only self-timer doesn't operate.
Shutter is operated too soon. )
Check voltage (OV) at Sa
(Self SW.) Фа and Фо.
YES
contact defective,
soldering defective.
1с4 ©. ©. ©
soldering defective.
Г IC 1 © soldering
defective.
|
IC 3 @ soldering
defective.
| 1C3 defective. |
— Es shortcircuited. |
| Pattern $) and LED
| board soldering
defective.
Se or LED board
contact defective.
1C3 ©, @ soldering
defective.
С; soldering
defective
ne К. shortcircuited. |
12
в [В.С lighting voltage defective.
Less than 1.85V or over 2. 15V
(at 25°C, room temp.)
|
YES
CILED for self-timer operation
(В.С indication) is too bright.
| YES
> IC3 defective |
D| Indicating LED doesn't light up. |
Refer to #1 on page 11
4
LED for self-timer operation | NO
(B.C indication) lights up.
Proceed to “LED for self-timer
el operation (B.C indication)
doesn't light up”.
YES
*2
Check voltage at
pattern (£'+ and
г.
Both AUTO and MANUAL | МО
are released.
NO
|
AR : shortcircuited |
YES
YES
YES
L____
Г When shorteircuited 1 |
between S ¡+ side in Ino/ AUTO is only
and {h-. indicating | released
| LED lights up.
|
Sa (AM change SW.)
contact defective
Pattern e ir and LED
board soldering
defective.
Su (brown) lead wire
soldering defective.
}-
Sy (ASA contact)
contact defective.
=
CdS defective. leg
broken, lead wire
soldering defective.
— К, soldering defective
S, (Metering SW.)
contact defective or
flexible board
connection soldering
defective.
Check voltage at IC 1 |] NO
(De. and h -.
YES
5, (AM change SW. |
contact defective.
Circuit board and
flexible board
soldering defective.
IC 1 @ soldering
defefective.
|
IC4 DO soldering
defective.
С; soldering
defective.
IC 1 06D soldering
defective.
К, soldering
defective.
\or
stays lighted.
ae ET
“LY (over-range mina)
Ma ral NO | MANUAL |
normal and shutter high speed.
speed uneven. —
ar YES
J
Check for Ry, Ry
defective.
Pattern E) and LED
board soldering
| Ca leg and pattern
shorteircuited.
and flexible
board contact.
YES
IC1 D soldering
defective.
Se (AM change SW.)
contact defective.
IC 1 @ soldering
defective.
Su (AV SW.)
contact defective.
1C1 @ and @
shorteireuited.
IC1 @ soldering
defective.
Ra, Re legs and
pattern contacted.
Indicating LED flickers | yes
1C1 @ soldering
defective.
Is, (ASA
during ASA dial operation. |
indicating LED flickers during | _
|
SW.)
contact defective.
SV resistor stained. |
м
diaphragm ring operation. |
Indication shows no change even | yes
Connecting ring brush
eontact defective or
one-sided.
AV resistor stained
or position deflected.
IC 1 (9 soldering
defective.
IC 1 49 soldering
defective.
when diaphragm is operated. |
np ЕЕ LYES
eter sensitivity 1$ wrong. |-
VR; soldering
defective.
Roa shortcircuited or
soldering defective.
Refer to “Adjustment” on
on Page. 33.
VR3 position deflected
or shorted.
Refer to “Adjustment
of VR;3.”
14
137
15
Indicating LED is too bright. |
ES —
Indicating LED is dark or incomplete. |
YES
f E
= Re shortcircuited. |
Refer to “Adjustment”
on Page. 36.
Reler to “Adjustment
Indicating LED partially fails to light up. |
YES
= of indicating LED
E =
View .
IC2 OOOOODD
|
Magnetic release doesn't operate. |
LED for self-timer
operation (B.C indcation)
lights up.
NO
Refer to #1 on Page. 11.
y
all times.
Indicating LED operates at
|
D@+ and h-. (3V)
los. voltage at 1C4 | NO
у
Check voltage at (Yu and h .
(3—0. 7V)
Proceed to “LED for self-
timer operation (B.C
indication) doesn't light up”.
Refer to E on Page. 14.
(1509020960 soldering
defective.
— 102 defective |
— | LED board defective. |
a Refer to “ ¥¥ (over-range warning) stays lighted’ |
IC4 D soldering
= м
fo. 7V at all times J,
el >: (Reset SW.) is
defective.
— С; soldering defective.
When release interlocked
lever (0571) is operated,
shutter works.
NO
Check voltage at IC4
(Bw. and h
(IV—0. 7V)
YES
Check voltage at 1C3
(Dd and ®..
ON at all times.
(0. BV)
Г С. shorteircuited. |
> TR shorteircuited. |
IC4 6. soldering
defective.
IC 3 @ soldering
defective.
Mg.2 defective or
soldering defective.
IC4 ($ soldering
defective.
Mechanical troubles,
| YES
mirror box, shutter,
| etc.
Even when ‘ZY (high luminance alarm) is lighted,
it can be released by operating release button.
| YES
—
Mg. 2 attracts
excessively.
TR defective or
soldering defective.
yo
16
Shutter speed is defective. |
Indicating LED operates at
all times.
YES
NO
Refer to M2 on Page. 13.
Refer to "LED doesn't lihht up”. |
Refer to M3 on Page. 14.
Refer to “Py (over-range warning)
stays lighted”.
AUTO, MANUAL, BULB are all at high
speeds. (Curtain doesn't open)
0, A
| When voltage (1.5V) is applied |, Removing circuit board A NO Mg. 1 defective, contact
| to pattern (4 and De, it is ro (lifting up) causes high =] stained, or soldering
| released. 1 speed operation. defective.
р 0° YES Refer to “Shutter
Adjustment” on Page. 8.
Magnetic piece over-
charge adjustment
ei defective. Reter to
“Adjustment of over-
charge”.
2 nd curtain stop lever
el or spring touches
circuit board А.
_|1C1 D soldering
defective.
IC4 QD) soldering
defective.
= AUTO and MANUAL-::: high speeds.
(Curtain doesn't opens)
= IC 1 Ó soldering
[check voltage at IC] О®- and b-. (0. pa = defective.
aa _| VR; soldering
| defective.
[No $: (Trigger SW.) |
| Check voltage at IC] О. and h-. (OV) i 3 (Trigger .) is
still OFF.
YES
IC 1 (0 soldering
| defective.
_|IC1 @ soldering
7
See Page. 17
defective.
УЕ, soldering
defective.
С, soldering
defective.
135
17
| AUTO and MANUAL:: curtain is kept open. |
С, soldering
defective or shorted.
IC 1 (2 soldering
defective.
IC1 (49 and (5
shortcircuited,
—
| 5: (Trigger SW.)
| is still ON.
_| 1С1 ® and ©
shortcircuited.
i
С ; shortcircuited.
Refer to “Adjustment”
on Page. 34—35,
AUTO exposure, MANUAL
sec. time adjustment
defective. Refer to
Adjustment Chart.
Refer to “Adjustment”
on Page. 31.
VR, shorted or
position deflected,
Refer to “Adjustment
of MANUAL sec.
time, ”
Refer to “Adjustment”
on Page. 32.
“Adjustment of VR,."
VR; position
deflected. Refer to
7
Ri. R, shortcireuited. |
| shortcircuited.
IC, As) and q
DEA Lo
> VR, shortcircuited. |
m
—
MANUAL contact
defective.
VR, soldering
defective.
Circuit board A lead
wires (brown and
green) soldering
defective.
CdS defective, lead
wire soldering
defective.
ASA contact defective
or loosened.
3
NO
Check voltage at С, ®+ and Me. (0. 6V)
po
| Check voltage at 1C1 (DD. and Ge. (3V) |
| YES
Auto and Manual------
4 short in sec. time.
Both AUTO and MANUAL-:::
> long in high speed sec. time.
Both AUTO and MANUAL-::
0 long sec. time on the whole.
>| Only MANUAL---high speed.
(curtain doesn't open)
8 Only MANUAL. «released.
(curtain is kept open)
Only AUTO---released.
9 mr A
(curtain is kept open)
S, (Bulb SW. )
shortcircuited.
Self-timer doesn't operate normally.
! es |
LED for self-timer operation
(B.C indication) lights up.
NO
Refer to À on Page.
1L
_ YES __
Indicating LED operates
NO
(B.C indication) doesn't light up.”
Proceed to “LED for self-timer operation
Refer to D (Page. 13) or E (Page. 14).
Proceed to “LED doesn't light up” or
normally.
YES
| Magnetic release operates. [NO
> vy (over-range warning) stays lighted”.
Refer to M on Page. 15.
| Proceed to “Magnetic release doesn't
operate.”
Self-timer doesn't work, and
shutter is released too soon.
| Pattern (Г) and LED
works.
LED for self-timer operation
stays lighted and self-timer
board soldering
| defective. |
Sa contact defective
or LED board contact
defective.
| 1C300 soldering
| defect ive.
—-[в. shortcircuited.
Hi
С; soldering defective. |
Self-timer works while LED for
self-timer operation is off,
|
- C4 soldering defective. |
IC 3 @ soldering
defective.
IC3 defective. |
LD defective. Lead
Shutter is not released while LED for
self-timer operation is on and off.
temperature too low.
Battery capacity insufficient or
NO
” wire or wiring board
soldering defective.
„| 1c4 ФФ®®
YES
soldering defective.
IC 3 (8) soldering
defective.
—
—— К; soldering defective. |
С, wrong in polarity
or defective.
YES
defective.
1C3 @ soldering defective.
— с, soldering defective. |
5, (Bulb SW.)
1
button is pressed.
Self-timer is normal while shutter
contact defective.
IC 3 @ soldering
defective.
y
167 в
19
Q | Strobo doesn't flash. |
Direct shoe contact
R | LED is not switched to “60”
with exclusive strobo.
$
Apply voltage (2.0V) to direct shoe contact fing
deformed.
Refer to “Shutter Adjustment”
on Page. 10.
Sy. (synchro contact)
defective. Refer to
Adjustment of shutter
block synchro time lag.
Synchro cord burnt out.
IC 3 © soldering
Ba and (h’-, and check voltage at pattern
Mé and e. (3.0V) |
ÎYES
defective.
Direct shoe contact
S | Speed is not switched to 1/60
with exclusive strobo.
se
` Refer to Q.
Strobo flashes when shutter is _| Proceed to
released. | flash.”
“Strobo doesn't
a A
| Released when voltage (2.0V) is applied |
defective.
Pattern ({ soldering
defective.
IC 1 ® soldering
| to direct shoe contact ®+ and h-. »
— << — ir A e Se EEE;
delective.
—— IC1 defective.
| Direct shoe contact B
T | Curtain is kept open when operated
with exclusive strobo mounted.
i YES
or C contact defective.
Direct shoe contact B
and C shortcircuited.
| Direct shoe contact B
U | Curtain is kept open when operated
by remote control.
YES
| and C shortcircuited.
[C2 (4: soldering
V | Winder doesn't operate. |
i +
| Winder unil 15 normal, PY Winder defective. |
YES
| defective.
Ra soldering
defective.
[C4 (0 soldering
defective.
WwW | Battery is exhausted too early.
Г Check current and leak current. 1
| * Below 35mA during B.C lighting.
| «Below 10mA during metering (S,, ОМ] ¡NO
20
Lead wire squeezed or
|
|
| * Below 30mA during releasing. |
| «Leak current (Su. OFF) less than 5мА. |
| Normal |
soldered part shorted.
— Battery box defective. |
SW. contact resistance
— too large or contact
shorted.
— Ca shorted. |
LED for self-timer
ts operation and body
shorted,
184
NA
oz
©
©
ANAL
e AA LA ALAIN
——F}-——-H||
oA
©—
15
IC 2 51866
Ш
16 15
14 13 12 u
33
WINDER CONTACT
|
"Al
Inspection Specification
1. This specification includes the allowable quality levels in the production line so that we can guarantee the quality of
products to the general users. The specifications are given in detail item by item so that you can refer to them when
handling the requirements of users. Also, you can use the specifications for rechecking the products after completion
of repair.
2. When carrying out outgoing or incoming inspections, do not directly apply the specifications to the measured values but
correctly understand the purposes of the inspections and then do the checkings, for instance, in accordance with the
incoming inspection specification manual.
3. Some users with special purposes may sometimes require different specifications because they are not satisfied with
this specification. In that case, give priority to the users’ requests and then make the necessary adjustments after
checking to see if they are possible or not.
(hater b eset
Item Check point Contents Ass'y. Adjust manual)
Winding Winding lever | Not smooth (uneven, catching), shifted back, noise, vertically
loose. - Р.23, 24
Winding torque-‘less than 4 kg:cm (with film).
Spool Operation""*Not smooth (uneven, squeaky). Check film winding. ny. 4
No-load operation" 250250 в.
Sprocket Operation’--Slip, back lash (after winding). Operation with rewind p24
button depressed (uneven, catching). Claw position. nu
Rewinding Rewind button | Operation’--Depressing, releasing, catching, uneven.
Rewind button lock position‘""over 0.3 mm P.3
(from bottom of lower cover).
Rewind crank Operation -"Off-center, squeaky, gritty, defective spring. Р 46
Film rewinding resistance 250-650 в. |
Film counter | Feed Operation": When wound twice from 5, indication shoud be 1.
It should correctly operate up to 36+1. Check for
failure, standstill, skip, deflection. PE 10
Deflection of scale position’‘-Center of letter should be within o
$$ «+ the range of index. Scale letter
should be easy to read.
Return Operation:::lt should return to S when back cover is opened.
Film sıgnal Appearance Operation": Signal should be as illustrated at the 1 st frame on
counter, midway, 36+2 frames.
Check for unsmooth operation (catching, etc).
No film lst frame Midway 36+2 frames
Cc) 4_) CD m
over 1/4 Slightly visible
Disappearance | Operation‘ Signal should disappear just before film is disengaged
from spool in rewinding,
[42
Checlung - Adipucs tient
Item Check point Contents DS Mt nome
Shutter Shutter button | Operation":*Not smooth, loose, catching, shock, stained, wrong
position. P24. 46
Operating-resistance'**290+ 50 в.
After-operation ellowance--"over 0.2 тт
Speed dial Operation:--Not smooth, clicking, auto lock, loose.
Auto lock'-'Loose, squeaky, gritty, etc.
Scale deflection "Center of letter should be aligned to index. P 46
u, и |111
А 1000
Shutter curtain | Operation**"Overlap, return (during little-by-little winding),
bounce. 2nd curtain appearance (in slow shutter), Р 47—51
bump, stop, noise. :
Curtain speed:--Within 13ms for both Ist and 2nd curtains.
Shutter speed | Allowable range‘ Refer to P.5. Р.34
Synchro Conduction'*:Light emission. No shorting during winding.
Delay time
Shutter Allowable
Contact Measurement
speed range
1/60 & | Time until contact is ON after over
$ strobo | curtain running. (A range) 0.3 ms
auto Time until curtain appearance over
after contact is ON. (B range) 2ms P.40
Contact efficiency
M Allowable
| Contact = Shutter speed |
Lime range
| x l.Oms 1/60 & strobo auto over 60%
Insulation resistance: over 10МП (250V D.C resistance meter)
Operating Lever Operation ‘Clicking. deflection, return, not smooth, catching,
switch defective spring. Return to ON position after B.C
check. return to click position from lever contact
position self side P.45
Letter indication should be aligned to lever index.
Self-timer Operation‘ l.amp should start blinking within | sec. after 5 button
release, and blinking cycle should become faster just
before release.
Alteration of blinking evele:
Start 4 Blinking start Blinking quickens P.39
O a. A A A. A AR — mn
Within t eee :
7 6-15 sec. =
\
pme À trent
Item Check point Contents enr ="
Operating Battery Operation*":Lamp should be lighted exactly.
switch Checker Lamp should be on in the range from 1/2 or over to B.C
contact. ON P.38
Е
di 1/2
Focus Mirror Operation -Loose, two-step, timing, wrong position, bounce.
Stop position::"45" 130" P.16
Raising position’--It should be unseen behind flare preventing board.
Body back 43. 70350. 01 mm Р.43
Finder back 43. 56 +0. 025 mm Р.44
Finder View Image turnover, co matching, scale plate deflection. P.M
Speed figure Scratches, dust, stains, etc.
band Figure and LED should be positioned within figure band. Ро
Back cover Opening, Clos- | Operation:--Locking, looseness after locking. It should smoothly
ing release when rewinding knob is shifted up.
P.10
Pressure plate | Distortion, projection, irregular surfaces, impurities, stains,
inclining. easy to come loose.
Auto exposure| ASA dial Operation':*Not smooth, catching, deflecting.
For ASA letter, scale and frame, the 3rd scale should be visible.
P.25, 46
100 correct, or 100 100
Over-rang LENS: 50mm F 1.4 ASA: 100
noninter locked bute
lock Luminance | F a Allowable range Spec.
speed
O eos effective +125 EV
EV 15 Е5.6| 1000 = - ga P.37
®lease 5 У
possible at EV 14. 25. 0.75 EV
It should be exactly locked with 1000 + or 1000 + LED lamp
lighted. ® it
Chechung Ads tment
Item Check point Contents sara org
Auto exposure | LED indication | Scratches, dust, cloud, light leakage (with dark finder)
LED difference-LENS: 50 mm Е 1.4 ASA: 100, Auto
| Caries Allowable range
Luminance | F-number LED + | + — | — | Spec.
1 10.51 0 [0.5] 1 `
1000 | + |3; | @ | ®|®
EV 14 F 5.6 500 500 | @ | at | + | @ |.
250 | @| @ | @| x |+
mire ele P.19, 33, 35
EV 11 F 8 30 30 | @ | mm |® | + TEV
15 |@|@ | @ |x |
s+|+1981810
EV 9 F 11 4 110 xt |3: |3: | @
2|® 007 |
LED other than correct LED and adjacent LED should not be
lighted.
LED lighting voltage"":2.0 V (in darkness).
Exposure Operation:*:Not smooth, clicking, lock release. Р 2%
correction
Exposure error | LENS: 50mm F 1.4 ASA: 100
Shutter | EE level nn:
Luminance F Variation
speed allowable range Р 35
EV 15 Е5.6| 1/1000
ЕХ 14 Е5.6| 1/500 | WithintO SEV | Within+0.6EV
EV 9 Е5.6| 1/15
Other Checker Room temperature: 25°C
performance voltage | Voltage Allowable Spec. ] Р 38
| 2 0 * Should be on at 2.15 V +0 15\
| * Should be off at 1.85 V
Touch awaken: || Ger Allowable range | Pr
operating |
1 10-30 MN
resistance AA |
HSE fash | Item Allowable range Spec. |
mea) Per lock | * Should be locked at 1.75 V. poy +0.15v P.37
voltage
. voltage * Should be released at 2.15 V. (0.25 У
Performance 2. 15 V~3.0V (constant voltage: 2.25~2.8 V)
assuring Р.40
voltage
Current Constant voltage: 2.8 V
consumption ltem Spec.
B.C lighted 35 mA max.
* LED 1 lamp —
2 lamps 1ОтА тах.
* Metering
Releasing 30 mA max.
Y
à (holas Ош
Item Check point Contents hey Mont
Other Leak current Constant voltage: 2.8V,5 mA max.
performance
Accessories Accessory Looseness, spring pressure, removal, inclining,
Safety switch stroke
doses pu
ccessory Shoald be off when
aot St
Remote control | Operation*":It should be easy to detach.
terminal Looseness, heavy, release, catching. P.13
Cable release switch operation:::70—300 в.
Synchro It should be easy to attach and detach. PR
terminal Looseness, stains, easy to come loose. |
Eye-piece Clicking, easy to come loose, inclined. P.4
attachment |
Lens lock Operation':*Heavy, light, gritty, squeaky, loose. P.14
Others Interchanges LED 60 blinking with exclusive strobo charge completed.
ability with | Tas Spec. |
exclusive z= 3% (ON) voltage 2.0V |
strobo LED blinking TS (OFF) voltage 1.67 | Free
Tuning" With charge completed, it should be tuned irrespective of
shutter dial position.
Caution : The 300 ( of resistor must connect to the plus side of
power sause when measure it.
Interchangeabi- | Winder connecting terminal voltage
lity with Winding completed (S 4 ОМ) over 1.0 V P.23
winder Releasing completed (S 4 OFF) ---below 0.2 V
Shutter speed specification
Speed | Strobo auto
l 1/2 l ’8 125
nie change 1/50 /4 l 1/15 1/30 | 1/60 | 1/ 1/250 | 1/500 | 1/1000
Standard value 20 ms 1000ms | 500ms | 250ms | 125ms |62. 5ms|31. 3ms| 15. 6ms|7. 81ms|3. 91ms| 1. 95тз |0. 977ms
Max. limit value 23 ma 1410ms | 707ms | 354тз | 177ms |88. 4тз | 44. 3ms|22. Ims| 11. Отз |5. 53ms|2. 76ms| 1. 38ms
Min. limit value 17 ms 707тз | 354ms | 177ms |88. 4тз | 44. Зтз | 22. Ims| 11. Oms | 5. 53ms |2. 76ms | 1. 38тз |0. 691ms
a +0.21 EV
Specified value —0.23 EV 10.5EV
Shutter speed and uneven exposure
Exposure time at both ends (A, C ranges) to center (B range) should be within +0. 25%, and maximum
and minimum values of B range should be within 0.4EV (+32% or —25%).
Shutter Parts List for XG series
1. In this parts list, the type of shutters made available up to now since the beginning of the massproduction of 2006
series is classified into types 1~4.
. See the parts list on the next page for each type.
. The part number on the exploded view of the parts list is sometimes provided with @ or €.
@ : Not interchangeable depending on the type of shutter.
@ : Discontinued in the course of production, addition or temporarily used.
Regarding the parts provided with @ or @, the description, differential points and replaceable type (common type)
is given in the specified page of Parts List Part I].
4. Inter changeability of shutter unit.
Shutter units (completed) of types 1—4 are interchangeable, but pay attention for combinations of parts for body
such as mirror return lever lock claw set (0522) and release operation lever spring (2035) shown below.
Gu г
1. ZO 7) A Fl12006% MRE MID OMEE Ох F—NFATHEI~AMERY, FnfhN37 1 TIEM 71
дить Tt,
2. Ж-УСВУ4 TORI HFERULTOWETNT, BM4HT4714FTOM—YIAL ALT Fat,
3. (- 7) AFORMAMDEREFII®, RI@MA CO TORNAN ET.
DEP: 219-074 TI EATEHREN ZU EHE FT,
DEN: SRP IR, HM, Moli eee (Rene Ent
SEEN UT US Mal Part List Part [OfnantA- Yi, УЧЕТА НЕК AP AT EA
LTMWETOCBHAL T Favs,
4. Zr 19-137 КОНЕ
1488947074913 (Kin) BMANAFTNAERENINE O, FRONT (35-RKL Lu
Y IMA y ho :0522, АНА УЧ > Y 2035) ОРТ Ти,
For type 1, 2, 2’ For type 3, 3’, 4
2006 -0522-01 2006-0522-02 (X) 2006-0522-02 (X) - |2006-0522-03
For type 1, 2, 2’, 3, 3’ For type 4
2006-2035-03 (x) 2006 -2035-06
= oe =e oe EE
@ 2035-06 can be used.
® 2035-0618 FA 5] WE
e (X) marked part will not be supplied.
© (XxX) POBDIMABLidA.
[91
Ш Type of shutter unit/Yry3-1=2Y FOMA
o The shutter unit for XG is available in 4 types 1—4.
ХВ + 939-1293 hits FROLIC, KECSIT1~4 HOMME TO.
Type 1
Туре 2, 2’
No available
No available
02 nd curtain stop part is modified. 4
e For type 2’, refer to Part Il, P. 9. ®
o 2 RIMA E
e2’MWi-ou7Tik, Part I, PP ISBRLT FA
Type 3, 3
Type 4
No available
у LE
e [irake mechanism is modified.
e For type 3’. refer to Part ].. P. | and 4.
0 T7L—2 MMe TY
Assy. Part No. 2006-0222- 11]
e Control mechanism is simplified.
e MiTo Part D, P. 1, 4% T Fat
o Bate E M Fit
Part No. Page
2006-0202 2
2006-0204- 2
2006-0207 2
2006-0212 2
2006-0214 1
2006-0219-- 1
2006-0242 -1
2006-0255-- 2
2006-0258 1
2006-0264----------- 1
2006-2104 2
2006-2105 2
2006-2106-- 2
2006-2107- ==]
2006-2108----------- 1
2006-2114----------- 2
2006-2 118----------- 1
2006-2123 =========-- 1
2006-2126----------- 1
2006-2130 1
2006-2131 -]
2006-2132 1
2006-2 ]49----------- 1
2006-2 144----------- 1
Part No. Page
2006-2147 1
2006-2148 1
2006-2149 2
2006-2150 2
2006-2157 2
2006-2158 2
2006-2 166----------- 1
2006-2 168---- 2
2006-2173 2
2006-2174 1
2006-2176 2
2006-2181 1
2006-2183 1
2006-2184--------- 1,2
2006-2185 PR |
2006-2189----------- 3
2006-2191- une
2006-2 198----------- 1
2006-2204----------- 2
2006-2214----------- 2
2006-2215----------- 1
2006-2216----------- 1
2006-221]7----------- 1
2006-22 18----------- 1
Part No. Page
Screw
9611-1620-01 --]
9611-1620-02 --1
9611-1665-01- 1
9612-1620-01------1,2
9612-1645-01-------- 2
9615-1416-01-------- 1
9615-1420-01-- 2
9615-1618-01- 1
E-ring
9721-0120-13------ 1,2
9721-0150-00- 2
9721-0150-13-------- 2
Washer
9791-1628-40-------- 2
9793-1635-40-------- 1
9793-2150-40------- =I
Type 1
г @2006- -2123-01
(P6)
Pases
Ane
| 2006-2 130-01 A
ь г iR?
% ыы | Е hy “oe | =
Base NT KT À À 9611-1665-01 | 9615-1618-019 -
AGAN 8 9612-1620-01
= 74-01 y - = E si
92006-2178 ye” 27 @ 2006-2118-01
3 - (P3)
@ 2006-2166-02- 7 ET |
(P2) & |
à 9611-1620-02
= @ 2006-2108-02
(P3) р
9611-1620-01
| к
@ 2006-2183-01 @ 2006-2107-01 S
(P4) (P6)
| | ze See Page 2
#
2006-2185-01)
| . AR
9721-0120-13
@ 2005-0258-11 4! | |
(Pa) y
er (8) 2006-2198-81
@:006-2181-01 e (РТ)
{24} a
whe | | |
E. | o 2006-2148-01
| (PF)
@ 2006-27 184-04
e, (Pa) |
|
| D 0703-1635-40 (x2)
© |
À 2006-2147-03 (x2)
2006-2143-01
@ 2006-0214-22
¿006-0242-11
O Qorós- 2160-40
@ 2006-2144-01
(PT)
Part No.
2006-0214-22
2006-0219-11
2006-0242-11
2006-0258-11
(2006-2185-01)
2006-0264-11
2006-2107-01
2006-2108-02
2006-2118-01
2006-2123-01
2006-2126-01
2006-2130-01
2006-2131-02
2006-2132-01
2006-2143-01
2006-2144-01
2006-2147-03
2006-2148-01
2006-2166-02
2006-2174-01
2006-2181-01
2006-2183-01
2006-2184-04
2006-2198-81
2006-2215-01
2006-2216-01
2006-2217-01
2006-2218-01
9611-1620-01
9611-1620-02
9611-1665-01
9612-1620-01
9615-1416-01
9615-1618-01
9721-0120-13
9/93-1635-40
9793-2150-40
Part Name
Shutter cover set
2nd. curtain stop lever set
shutter curtain set
lst. curtain brake lever set
Brake lever isolation collar
Trigger base plate set
end. curtain shutter gear
Control cam
Control cam operation spring
Vr yr i—Aé¿—|] Et» b
ра Ч: А |
Vrr2¿—HErt» }
IMP v—s#Vrs—+ty }
IETUPER À 3 —
hYH—-BRt yb
LEVAS A] EN
#18 à 2
8) 0 » 2. BK RSP
2nd. curtain stop lever spring 2% hik Y +*—SP
Curtain shaft receiver-B
Adjusting screw
Curtain ribbon guide plate
Ribbon guide plate screw
end. curtain roller-A
2nd. curtain roller-B
Ratchet
Ratchet stop spring
Trigger contact
screw
2nd. curtain brake lever
lst. curtain brake spring-B
2nd. curtain brake spring
Light shield plate
Adjusting coilar-A
Adjusting collar-B
Adjusting collar-C
Adjusting collar-D
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
E-ring
Washer
Washer
EMB
RRIME Lx
RV KY HA FR
RV KY HA PFRIEDEA
2 = — 5 —À
2Eu-—>5-B
2x7) 7 MMIELDIFI> $
Ут НЕЮ”
FUI EH
bY A—-BSRMAAL
20 7v—-+rv.i—
1 7 v— +SP—B
LKR 7 v—+S5?P
SP fi HE AR
BMRA 7 — À
ai MRM > —B
#61) MR MF AW 3 —C
В М BL ff > — D
Ni
FEA EN AL
HER HAE AL
FEA ANB AL
FER ANB AL
FEAR OBA
FEAR BA A L
EY YY
WO» y —
MO » + —
— pp ppp fp q
KF FP FP FP FP FY PR NN RR PR RA pp pa pa pa à Pp
Po NN Pr PP Pp.
Type 1
9721-0120-13
|
ER 0721-0150-13
_2006-2104-01
2006- 2105-02
„=“
= =
@ 2006- 2189-02
(Pa) ai 9515-1420-01
2006-0207-11 a e
pS (9 2006-2204-01
(#7)
@:6:2-1620-01 ay
(PT)
|
($ (9721-0150-00)
|
ey) @12006-2173-01)
(F3)
@ 2006-2149-01 TO: 2006-2176-02)
‚ {Рё} (P3)
@ 2006-2 191-0.
ir.
| Pi
$ 2006-2164-04
9612-1645-0) |
3 Sa : I @2006-< 18-01 @ 2006-215 1-02
@ 2000-2 168-4! , LEIA (РЗ)
b- -ы |
ire) N 6
971-0120 -13
(zo) $
NN) 2006-2150-03
a
RQ © ©791-1628-40 (xv)
|
@ 2006-0255-11
LP.)
Part No.
'2006-0202-11
(2006-2173-01)
(2006-2176-02)
(9721-0150-00)
2006-0204-11
2006-0207-11
2006-0212-12
2006-0255-11
2006-2104-01
2006-2105-02
2006-2106-02
2006-2114-02
2006-2149-01
2006-2150-03
2006-2157-02
2006-2158-01
2006-2168-01
2006-2184-04
2006-2189-02
2006-2191-02
2006-2204-01
2006-2214-01
9612-1620-01
9612-1645-01
9615-14. C10]
9721-0120-13
9721-0150-13
9791-1628-40
Part Name Qty
Control base plate set MBER > b 1
Trigger contact operation lever bY) H—-#H FRU -S— 1
Operation lever isolation tube К Y W-#A fu ER 1
Fa=Y
E-ring | Е ух 1
Shutter base plate set YxvF—-Bait yb 1
X contact plate set XREhHht> $ 1
lst. curtain stop lever set | > EVA tsb 1
2nd. curtain release lever set ZE MB et e | - 1
Charge gear-B Fr - VYE£r—B 1
Charge gear-A GET 1
lst. curtain shutter gear 1lE&EY/r,A4-#r7r— 1
lst. curtain stop lever spring 1 Ее —SP 1
Shutter magnet core Yoru IZA TIAS FER 1
Shutter magnet ts LR y FRA 1
2nd, curtain release lever spring 24 MF U -*—SP 1
Over charge spring Reh >A—.—*+ y — Ep 1
Trigger base plate screw FUN AEBB AA LC 1
2nd. curtain brake spring © 24 7 Vv — +SP 1
X lever spring X wes—SP 1
Shutter magnet bobbin Ves IZ] TIAS AREA 1
X earth plate XT—-AR 1
Tape (per roll) ETFERMAS-7 1
Phillips type screw +ERAAN Bhat 1
Phillips type screw FTREARHAHE A AL 1
Pniliaps type screw TERMAS AT 1
E-ring EVI 3
E-ring БуУХЛ | 1
Washer MO y» Y — 1
20°
Part No. Page
2006-0202 2
2006-0204--- -2
2006-0207 - 2
2006-0212 2
2006-0214 1
2006-0219 1
2006-0242-- 1
2006-0255 2
2006-0258 ci]
2006-0264 1
2006-2104 2
2006-2105 =========== 3
2006-2106 2
2006-2107- 1
2006-2108 1
2006-2114 2
2006-2118-- 1
2006-2123 1
2006-2126--- 1
2006-2130-- 1
2006-2131 -=========== 1
2006-2132----------- 1
öde 1 nn N
2006-2144 1
I N E
Part No. Page
2006-2147 1
2006-2148 L
2006-2149 2
2006-2150 2
2006-2157 2
2006-2158 2
2006-2166 1
2006-2168 2
2006-2173 2
2006-2174 1
2006-2176 -2
2006-2181--- 1
2006-2183----------- 1
2006-2184 1:2
2006-2185 1
2006-2189 2
2006-2191----------- 2
2006-2198-- -]
2006-2204 ug
2006-22 14=-========= =2
2006-22 15-4--------- 1
2006-2216----------- ]
2006-2217----------- ]
2006-22 18----------- 1
9793-1635-40-
Part No. Page
Screw
9611-1620-01 1
`9611-1620-02- 1
9611-1665-01-------- 1
9612-1620-01------ 1,2
9612-1645-01 2
9615 -1416-01 1
9615-1420-01- 2
9615-1618-01 1
E-ring
9721-0120-13------1,2
9721-0150-00------ BR
9721-0150-13 2
Washer
9791-1628-40-------- 5
9793-2150-40------
Type 2
2006-2174-01
@ 2006-2166-02 _-
2006-2217-01 °"
2006-2218-01 °F e
ee
2006-2215-01 or
В 2006-2216-01
>
(P6)
0 2006-2123-03
(P6)
poo
0615-1618-01
| 9612-1620-01
=~ N 9615-1416-0
br ix2)”
(P2) e
a GE @ 2006-2108-02 Uy, FF RE" “9% 9611-1620-02
(P3) Е | >
Soc1- 1620-01 ES >
@ 2006-2183-01 @ 2006-2107-< ES
(P4) (P6) . A).
| ’ | See Раде 2
(2006-2185-01 } im .
° 9721-0120-13 j Nr
(P4
er
@ 2006-0258-11 a
]
gaara PS
veer
dl © EN o &
|
|
-2198-81
(P7)
i sce: 2184-04 A. —
ger (pa) z. '
=" 2006-2131-02 [ | Moor
|
€
| 9793-1635-40
| &
1
2006-2147-03
1 (x2)
2006-2143-01
2006-0242-11
1
|
(=>.@) 9793-2 DT
rm
©
09
Part No.
2006-0214-22
2006-0219-12
2006-0242-11
2006-0258-11
(2006-2185-01)
2006-0264-11
2006-2107-01
2006-2108-02
2006-2118-01
2006-2123-03
2006-2126-01
2006-2130-01
2006-2131-02
2006-2132-01
2006-2143-01
2006-2144-01
2006-2147-03
2006-2148-01
2006-2166-02
2006-2174-01
2006-2181-01
2006-2183-01
2006-2184-04
2006-2198-81
2006-2215-01
2006-2216-01
2006-2217-01
2006-2218-01
9611-1620-01
9611-1620-02
9611-1665-01
9612-1620-01
9615-1416-01
9615-1618-01
9721-0120-13
9793-1635-40
9793-2150-40
Part Name
Shutter cover set
2nd. curtain stop lever set
Shutter curtain set
lst. curtain brake lever set
Brake lever isolation collar
Trigger base plate set
2nd. curtain shutter gear
Control cam
Control cam operation spring
nd. curtain stop lever spring
Curtain shaft receiver-R
Adjusting screw
Curtain ribbon guide plate
Ribbon guide plate screw
2nd. curtain roller-A
end. curtain roller-B
Ratchet |
Ratchet stop spring
Trigger contact
Screw
2nd. curtain brake lever
lst. curtain brake spring-B
2nd. curtain brake spring
Light shield plate
Adjusting collar-A
Adjusting collar-B
Adjusting collar-C
Adjusting collar-D
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
E-ring
Washer
Washer
rs Bts |
жи ф-т
Yvryicktrt
I$7v-+zv-,i— ty}
1% SV — + BRAS
hv H—-BRt ob
EV A
LUE EEE
Im 2 > © MSP
2H F1 V > —SP
ME wh eB
EME Lx
EY Kv WA VR
FIX NA FREDO
2Eu—>5-—A
2 u—>5-—BD
EXTI LME Я FT SR
7FL Pipe x
bY) H-#E
FY NA ARRE
2E TY iLU— es
1H Y VU — +SP—B
2h 7 Y — PSP
ESPA Et AR
Bi MRM À 3 — A
Bi MRRP 7 —В
№ 3045 Я 3 —C
НЯ 7 —D
—
+
TERA ASB a E
= +
+
—
bd bit es et ei
BE = A RA Е Е PY pp D HY FA Fr M PP
Tres
"ee. u
. Ne. Rp ps
Type 2
9721-0120-13
& 9721-0150-13
2006-2214-01
(9721-0150-00)
Ó 2006-2149-01
(P2)
=”
&
<} @ (2006-2173-01)
(P3)
"@(2006-2176-02)
(Pa)
SS,
|
…
t
iss
Venen.
(P3)
9721-0120-13 A So
ee 2006-2150-03
®
$
2006-2158-02
o (PIN
caries Ep (|
@ 2006-2168-01
(P2)
9791-1628-40
ix?)
на
Part No.
© 2006-0202-12
(2006-2173-01)
(2006-2176-02)
(9721-0150-00)
2006-0204-12
2006-0207-11
2006-0212-12
2006-0255-12
2006-2104-01
2006-2105-02
2006-2106-02
2006-2114-02
2006-2149-01
2006-2150-03
2006-2157-03
2006-2158-02
2006-2168-01
2006-2184-04
2006-2189-02
2006-2191-02
2006-2204-01
2006-2214-01
9612-1620-01
9612-1645-01
9615-1420-01
9721-0120-13
9721-0150-13
9791-1628-40
Part Name
Control base plate set
Trigger contact operation lever
я: Е
Qty
ME TS —
Operation lever isolation tube HJ H—-# HEU — №
E-ring
Shutter base plate set
X contact plate set
lst. curtain stop lever set
end. curtain release lever set
Charge gear-B
Charge деаг-А
lst. curtain shutter gear
lst. curtain stop lever spring
shutter magnet core
Shutter magnet
Ey>7
Yx¥r7F%—-BRt ob
X #H +> |b
Rik ЖУК
жи
Pr 9Er—B
EIER
1l&Y/ry21-#ır—
1% E v-*—SP
Fa—7
ия LR EE
CE DE ee AE 2
2nd. curtain release lever spring ЖЕ Y -*—SP
Over charge spring
Trigger base plate screw
end. curtain brake spring
Х lever spring
Shutter magnet bobbin
Хх earth plate
Tape (per roll)
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
E-ring
E-ring
Washer
RMR AA Fe
bY HF-BRRARLE
2% 7 Y — + SP
X v-s—SP
Y SP
vry3- SRI KEY
X T—-AR
ETFZERMT-7
TFIKA ANB Aa
TEKH ANB DAL
TTR OB Re
EU?
Е УЛ
MO » Y rr —
1
1
1
1
20
8
Part No, Page
2006-0202 2
_ 2006-0204 2
2006-0207--- 2
2006-0212--- 1
2006-0214 1
2006-0219 1
2006-0242----------- 1
2006-0255--- 2
2006-0258 2
2006-0259 2
2006-0264 1
2006-2104-----------2
2006-2105----------- 2
2006-2106----------- 2
2006-2107----------- 1
2006-2108 =
2006-2114 ее
2006-2118- =
2006-2123----------- l
2006-2126----------- 1
2006-2130----------- 1
2006-2131----------- 1
2006-2132----------- 1
2006-2143-- --1
I N E
Part No. Page
2006-2144 1
2006-2147 1
2006-2148---- 1
2006-2149 2
2006-2150 2
2006-2157 2
2006-2158 2
2006-2166 1
2006-2168 2
2006-2173 2
2006-2174 1
2006-2176----------- 2
2006-2183 -2
2006-2184 2
2006-2185 2
2006-2189----------- 2
2006-2191--- 2
2006-2192--- 2
2006-2196 2
2006-2197 2
2006-2198 1
2006-2214 “5
2006-2215--- 1
2006-2216- =)
2006-2217-- 1
Part No.
2006-2218
Page
2006-2221--
Screw
9611-1620-01
9611-1620-02
9611-1665-01
9612-1618-01
9612-1620-01
9612-1645-01
9615-1416-01
9615-1420-01-
9615-1618-01
E-ring
9721-0120-13--
9721-0150-00
1,2
9721-0150-13----
Washer
9791-1628-40
9793-1635-40
204
Type 3
2006-2215-01 or
2006-2216-01
2006-2217-01 °°
2006-2218-01 °F
A
O
ms
O 2006-2123-03
(P6)
2006-2174-0) UP
97
2006-2130-01
15-14
nt 9615-1618-01
a AÑ 0611-1665-01
/ ©%в11-1620-01 =” <A
Е s > 9612-1620-01
2006-2166-02 >
(P2) a7
9721-0120-13 ia к"
“
2006-2114-02
2006-2131-02
-01 O 2005-2148-01
: (PS) (P7)
A 9793-1635-40
(x2)
2006-2147-03
(x2)
б ¿006-2143-01
|
2006-0242-11
ze
|
(Je 2006-21 44-02
(РТ) AO
Part No. Part Name
2006-0212-12 lst. curtain stop lever set IKEA Пр 7 }
2006-0214-22 Shutter cover set Vr ri HEBE AY |
2006-0219-12 2nd. curtain stop lever set 2 @ykU-t—+o}
2006-0242-11 Shutter curtain set Vr y HP
2006-0264-11 Trigger base plate set tv) A—-BR+t > }
2006-2107-04 2nd. curtain shutter gear 2 Y + 3—- EN
2006-2108-02 Control cam MI 2.
2006-2114-02 lst. curtain stop lever spring ТЕЖ $ —5Р
2006-2118-01 Control cam operation spring — MM» 4 BK MSP
2006-2123-03 2nd. curtain stop lever spring 2 ik v-*—SP
2006-2126-01 Curtain shaft receiver-B Жив
2006-2130-01 Adjusting screw Rhee =
2006-2131-02 Curtain ribbon guide plate RVKYHA PR
2006-2132-01 Ribbon guide plate screw BY > HA PR twee
2006-2143-01 2nd. curtain roller-A 2% с — 5 —AÀ
2006-2144-02 2nd. curtain roller-B 2 u-—>5-—B
2006-2147-03 Ratchet EXT IS I TELE:
2006-2148-01 Ratchet stop spring УТУ
2006-2166-02 trigger contact bY) H-#BE
2006-2174-01 Screw bY HF-SmRMMTAL
2006-2198-81 Light shield plate ESP HH Et
2006-2215-01 Adjusting collar-A №] 945 EN ft à 5 — A
2006-2216-01 Adjusting collar-B HIMRm kt + = —В
2006-2217-01 Adjusting collar-C DU ARK MF à > —C
2006-2218-01 Adjusting collar-D $] MAR RH 5—D |
9611-1620-01 Phillips type screw TERHA SB A Aa [>
9611-1620-02 Phillips type screw ЕАН аль Г
9611-1665-01 Phillips tyep screw +EKAAN Eb
9612-1620-01 Phillips type screw TERRA BA hae
9615-1416-01 Phillips type screw +ERAM Bhatt
9615-1420-01 Phillips type screw FTERHRAMAJ AT
9615-1618-01 Phillips type screw HERA MAd |:
9721-0120-13 E-ring E YY
9793-1635-40 Washer MO y» Y yr —
bé hh ps pa pp
Rh PR PR PP NY KF FY FY FY FY FY Pp poo fal
т?
+
~ - N # PP bp
Type 3
9721-0150-13 ES
@2006-2106-04
9721-0150-13
® 2006-0250-11 | д
@ 2006-0259-13 °
(P4)
@ ( 2006-2192-04)
(PA) O 2006-2197-01
i (P4)
2006-2221
@ 2006-2196-01 0.0 = eas
(P4) >
7 2006-0207- 11
E
D 9612-1618-01 69 2006-22 14-01
|
@ (9721-0150-00)
(2006-2173-01)
S (PI)
WI 2006-2176-02)
(P3)
Ps
9612-1645-01 ssp
@ 2006-2168-01
(P2)
9721-0120- ug?
к 2150-03 |
Doro 1-1628-40 | X2)
pal
Part No
2006-0202-12
(2006-2173-01)
(2006-2176-02)
(9721-0150-00)
2006-0204-34
2006-0207-11
| 2006-0255-12
2006-0258-43
(2006-2185-01)
2006-0259-11
(2006-2192-04)
2006-2104-01
2006-2105-02
2006-2106-04
2006-2149-01
2006-2150-03
2006-2157-03
2006-2158-02
2006-2168-01
2006-2183-03
2006-2184-04
2006-2189-05
2006-2191-02
2006-2196-01
2006-2197-01
2006-2214-01
2006-2221-81
9612-1618-01
9612-1645-01
9721-0120-13
9721-0150-13
9791-1628-40
Part Name Oty
Control base plate set MMB Ms | 1
Trigger contact operation lever bY AE HE A 1
Operation lever isolation tubek + y — Eh Pb y MR 1
-7
E-ring E)v?z dis 1
Shutter base plate set - - Vr IBM >P 1
X contact plate set X BH+«u>b 1
Second curtain release lever set 2B MKBU-s—+ >} 1
1st. curtain brake lever set 1ET7V— VS А 1
Brake lever isolation collar 1E7LV—- +8 à 3 — 1
2nd. curtain brake lever set 2E 7Jv—- VA Ey | 1
2nd. curtain brake spring 2 7 y — PSP 1
Charge gear-B Fr—iEr—B 1
Charge gear-A Fr—>EY—A 1
lst. curtain shutter gear 1l& 7 rr ixr— 1
Shutter magnet core rs She b RE 1
Shutter magnet ИУ 1
2nd. curtain release lever spring 2Æ MEY -*-—SP 1
Over charge spring RH + — 25 Fy — SP 1
Trigger base plate screw PU H—-BSRRAHL 1
lst. curtain brake spring-B 1H Y LU — +SP-B 1
2nd. curtain brake spring 21 7v—-+SP 1
X lever spring X L-°—SP l
Shutter magnet bobbin YerrvZ—-wZFAxyhKYY 1
2nd. curtain brake return spring 2% 7 L— +k LSP 1
Brake lever axis collar zu 7v —- ME D 5 — 1
Tape (per roll) HTFSEHF- 7 1
Spring tube 2 Уи — Рф 1
Phillips type screw FERHASA JN ha E 1
Phillips type screw HEAR À SL 1
E-ring E Y y Y 3
E-ring E Y y Yy
Washer MO » Y + — = 21”
Part No. Page
2006-0207 -—2
2006-0209 2
2006-0211- - -2
2006-0215 1
2006-0218 1
2006-0222 1
2006-0229-- =.
2006-0242 -1
2006-0253 2
2006-0258-- -2
2006-0259-- 2
2006-0267-- 2
2006-2104---- 2
2006-2105----------- 2
2006-2106---- 2
2006-2114----------- 1
2006-2130----------- 1
2006-2131 =========-=-= 1
2006-2133 2-========-=- у
2006-2143 1
2006-2144 1
2006-2147 ]
2006-2148----------- 1
2006-21 68----------- 2
Part No. Page
2006-2183 2
2006-2184 2
2006-2185 2
2006-2189 2
2006-2192 2
2006-2196 2
2006-2197 2
2006-2214 2
2006-2707 1
2006-2708 1
2006-2718 1
2006-2723-- 1
2006-2726-- 1
2006-2749 2
2006-2757-- 2
2006-2758-- 2
2006-2762--- 2
2006-2766----------- 2
2006-2773 2
2006-2790 1
2006-2791 ——2
2006-2799 1
Screw
9611-1620-01-- 2
9612-1618-01-------- 2
9612-1620-01------ Lye
9615-1416-02 1
9615-1420-01 1
9615-1625-02 1
E-ring
9721-0120-13------1,2
9721-0150-13- 2
Washer
9793-1635-40 1
214,
Type 4
. Assy. Part №. 2006-0222-11
ee ) © 2006-2790-81 or
A
(6) 2006-2799-81
See Page 2ip 5 "+ 0
T 7 ®
A
2006-2130-01 ae
@2006-2718-07 9615-1416-02 +
(x2)
LL De f
2006-2708-02 : ' ABS
O 006-2108-02 TT AUS _?
= Le > AK
| O 2006-2707-01 (P6) N“
‘ ©
at Ww
9721-0120-13 ES LAT "| 9615-1625-02
- м SD
2006-21 14-02 -
|
@ 2006-0215-11
(P6) See Page 2
|
9793-1635 -40
(x2) S
2006-2132-01
=
ES 2006-2147-03
(x2)
2006-0242-11
(2790-81, (2799-81
Do not remove 2790-81 (or 2799-81)
from the shutter. No need to use
2790-81 (or 2799-81) when 0209
(shutter base plate set) is exchanged. (E 6 2000-2144-02
(PTI
f(HaAantvhare sr 2—-DONMNAEAUMEE, MLY + 2 —
Gees (0209) EXSBALASHTILACTLA In,
Part No.
2006-0222-11
2006-0215-11
2006-0218-11
2006-0229-11
2006-0242-11
2006-2114-02
2006-2130-01
2006-2131-02
2006-2132-01
2006-2143-01
2006-2144-02
2006-2147-03
2006-2148-02
2006-2707-01
2006-270B-02
2006-2718-02
2006-2723-02
2006-2726-01
2006-2790-81
2006-2799-81
9612-1620-01
9615-1416-02
9615-1420-01
9615-1625-02
9721-0120-13
9793-1635-40
Part Name
Shutter complete set
lst. curtain stop lever set
Shutter cover set
2nd. curtain stop lever set
Shutter curtain set
lst. curtain stop lever spring
Adjusting screw
Curtain ribbon guide plate
Ribbon guide plate screw
2nd. curtain roller-A
2nd. curtain roller-B
Ratchet
Ratchet stop spring
end. curtain shutter gear
Control cam
Control cam operation spring
2nd. curtain stop lever spring
Curtain shaft receiver-B
Adjusting washer (0.1mm)
Adjusting washer (0.05mm)
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
Phillips type screw
E-ring
Washer
Vr i—709/7)
ЕЖЕ e y À
A AE o A
2 ik UA Er}
Vr y i—MHtr> bt
IHAL VA=xA7Y Y
шие
EY KY HA FR
EI IX HA РЕЕЮЕХ
2#u — 5 —AÀ
2Æ 0 — 5 —B
ESP Mik FF = SA
У ЕЮ Ж
LEYVA rr EY —
i) 80 2 4
8180 > ^ BK GSP
2% AE VS —SP
Mh B
FEA ANB AL
TFKANMBhAL
TFARA DOD Behav
TFKADBhAL
E)v?7
M7 y» Y + —
Qty
Type 4
9721-0150-13 (4
@2006-2106-04
(P7)
|
9721-0150-13 e
a
Er
ae
at a
2006-2197-01
Oi 2006-2192-04)
(P4) @ 2006- “2198-5,
alu 2006-2196-01 (PA
| e (P4) E
4) — 2006-2185-01) ee
> @ 20065-0258-43 : A
1P4) a ="
@2006-2183-03 | |
(P4) e. L- |
‘ E ==”
Е. - 2006-0207-11
Pr e” | 2006-2214-01
9612-1618-01
it
2006-2184-04 CMD
0 2006-2762-02
(P2 8)
(P3) y
oy @2006-2749-02
9612-1620-01 ——_ ie (P2,8)
A
Part No. Part Name
2006-0207-11 X contact plate set X #H +o }
2006-0209-11 Shutter base plate set Vrri—aGNRt> Pd
2006-0211-12 Control base plate set MBR > >»
2006-0253-11 2nd. curtain release lever set 2#MBV-’'— ty}
2006-0258-43 lst. curtain brake lever set IRF vV—F#VA—+ y |
(2006-2185-01 ) Brake lever isolation collar 1% TV —+BR D 5 —
2006-0259-13 2nd. curtain brake lever set 2 7vV—-#vUA—+y}
(2006-2192-04) 2nd. curtain brake spring 2E Y VU — SP
2006-0267-21 Winding base plate set Mg. EMEN =>» |
2006-2104-01 Charge gear-B Fr—ikEer—B
2006-2105-02 Charge gear-A Fr— YEr—A
2006-2106-04 lst. curtain shutter gear IE Vr yixir—
2017-2168-01 Trigger base plate screw Fy) F—-BGRRAHRLE
2006-2183-03 lst. curtain brake spring-B 1 > Vv — +SP—B
2006-2184-04 2nd. curtain brake spring ZE 7 Vv — +SP
2006-2189-05 X lever spring X wei—SP
2006-2196-01 2nd. curtain brake return spring2# 7 v-— +A LSP
2006-2197-01 Brake lever axis collar 2ETUAFME D 5 —
2006-2214-01 Tape (per roll) HKITIFERHTF— 7
2006-2749-02 Shutter magnet core VEA] TIAS ERT
2006-2757-03 end. curtain release lever spring 2Æ MH Y -* —SP
2006-2758-01 Over charge spring RH AK eK + + — YP
2006-2762-02 Magnet collar УЖЕ» 5 —
2006-2766-03 Trigger contact bt) a:
2006-2773-03 Trigger contact operation lever К \ H-#KERBU-S—
2006-2791-02 Shutter magnet bobbin VAART A b> KU Y
9611-1620-01 Phillips type screw +FRHANH AU
9612-1618-01 Phillips type screw HER A <B/h h L
9612-1620-01 Phillips type screw +EAHANE L
9721-0120-13 E-ring | EV y
9721-0150-13 E-ring
Е ПУХ
Shutter Parts List Part I
This parts list is for XG type shutter parts, in which modifications of parts with @ or @ mark are detailed.
1. Indications Type 1~4 are used for parts which differ with type of shutter unit, and there is no interchangeability
between types.
2. Parts indicated by Type A~B are interchangeable with other types only when they come in a set with the relative
parts of each type:
САУНА, XGA: à 0 7 YU ARS, ФЕ. LIL@MO OU COSMO RWINGE Æ MME TOE.
l. 279-124 ROPA TIL E- CME 5 ини Туре 1~Type 4 АЕ, #74 THOU AN EA
2. Туре А-В; Ral Cust, IE (ROMO) Et bh TANTO IA 7 E ZETA
1. Shutter base plate / Y + »37—-BiR
Type 1
Type 2, 2’
Type 3
2006-0204-11
2006-0204-12 (X)
2006-0204-33 (X)
E A A ARA A ss A аа ат
2006-0204 |
2006-0209 !
Shutter bose plate set
a ch
A A A a A A в
‚Ms
p à à A
Г й
р 8
1 o [o N
=o 4 | SR
à |]
oe, e
= = =
= E — >
5 & |
Туре 3 Туре 4
2006-0204-34 2006-0209 -11
J o>
oe oo
3,
2. Control base plate / Mom
@For Type 2’, refer to P. 9.
@ Туре 2° (22 TIP. 9 F4BMLTTFA DN
Type |
Type 2, 3, Y
Type 4
2006-0202-11
2006-0202-12
2006-0211 -12
2006-0253-11
2006-2149-01 X 2006-2749-02 9D
/ 2017-2168-01 1 //
Po =” S -2006-2762-02
on /\ Type | is used. | a
T Be fifi | .
ype 1 # EN 2
2006 - 2168-01 BY 2 к
2006-2791 -02
2006-2191 -02
® See Page E
2006-0267-21
2006-0264-11
Type 1 is used.
2006-2174-01
Туре 1 & ЕН]
dl
2006-2166-02
Туре | is used,
Туре 1 & (EH)
2006 -2766-03
Type 1 Type 2, 3, 3’ Type 4
2006-2173-01 2066-2773-03
2006-2173-01 SS
oS Type 1 is used.
AED Туре 1 £/£H
pr
SD 006-2176-02
2006-2108-02
Type 1 is used.
2006-2708 -02
D
Type 1 & EH
2006-2118-01 2006-2718-02
Type 1 is used.
3% Type 1 fe ВИ! Ne,
2006-2158-01
+
3.5 =
2006-2158-02
-
4.7om =a
2006-2758-01
\—
2006-2157-02
2006-2157-03
2006-2757-03
e
A A A A MA A TRA
2006-0202, 0211
2006-0255, 0253
2006-0264
2006-0267
2006-2108, 2708
2006-2118, 2718
2006-2149, 2749
2006-2157, 2757
2006-2158, 2758
2006-2166, 2766
2006-2168 |
2017-2168 |
2006-2173, 2773
2006- 2174 Screw
2006-2191, 2791
2006-2762
AAA
Control Базе plate set МЕ - +
2nd. curtain release lever set
Trigger base plote set
Wiring base plate set
Control com ЖМЖ Z
Control com operation spring #7 LS P
Da 3-0 Th ER os
2 EMIR L<— SP
Shutter magnet core
2 nd. curtain release lever spring
Over charge spring WMNRH*-="-++-5SP
Trigger contact b'l 7—{ély
PO тра С
НН 4 BI EL —
Trigger base plate screw
Trigger contact operation lever
KL
Shutter magnet bobbin ++ 7-- 74 kz
Magnet collar v7? ,; Ait # 5 —
AAA A
2 HARE Le ri 4 ,
LUNAR ERMUA » |
МЕ. ИМЕ т
221
3. 1st and 2nd curtain brake/ 1, 2B7L-—-*
Type 1, 2, 2 Type 3 Type 3’, 4
2006-0258-11 2006-0258-43
„#7 — el Type 3 is used.
TS y Type 3 #18
2006-2181-01 2006-0259-11 2006-0259-13
2006-2183-01
2006-2183-03
Type 3 is used.
Type 3 & (EM
2006-2184-04
“er
2006-2192-04
Type 3 is used,
Туре 3 & ШИ]
Not used.
Шо
2006-2196-01
Type 3 is used.
Type 3 +(EH]
2006- 2189-02
—
2006-2189-05
Type 3 is used.
Туре 3 (EM
2006-2197-01
Not used, Type 3 is used.
ине зо on Type 3 & №1]
2006-2221-81
Not used. _ ss, Not used.
MS м = < EL Su
O See Page 5
2006-0258 Ist. curtain broke lever set 1%87L-%+L+i-+4/,+P
2006-0259 2nd. curtain brake lever set 27-4 ei-+ , 1
2006-218) 2nd. curtoin broke lever 2M67L-*+L+i-
2006-2183 lst. curtain broke lever spring-B 18 7L -+SP-B
2006-2184 2 nd, curtain broke spring 28&7--+4SP
2006-2189 X lever spring Xb -ATN SF
2006-2192 2nd. curtain broke spring 2676 -+5Р
2006-2196 2nd. curtain broke return spring 2@7+—-4KLSP
2006-2197 Broke lever axis collar 2% YL-+ Mts >-
2006-2221 Spring tube 2%871L-+SPME+ :-7
Ш Spring tube (2006-2221) / 2M7L-—+SPMMF 2 — F (2006-2221) (CDT
To prevent breakage of 2nd curtain brake spring, tube (2221) is set to 2nd curtain brake spring (2192) for Type 3
shutter in the course of production. When disassembling Type 3 shutter with no the tube, set the tube by the
method shown below,
(The tube is not needed for Type 3’ and 4 shutters because the 2nd curtain brake lever set (0259) has been modi-
fied in shape.)
Type 34 4-7 9-ORMVEN 2 ETL—-+SPOMHHILELT. +27 (2221) 942 7L-—+SP (2192) [rt k à
NTUET, Fa-—TFOMG Trg Type 34 4477-ODMIFL, FTROEMTFA- TAM HT Fav,
(Type 3°, 424 77-TlE2RTL—-4AL—t yb (0259) РИКИ НИТЬ, Fa-—TiTEtCT)
D
2
®
-- OALTECO
FLF 2
4. Shutter cover plate / Y + y %—H/i—M$K
FA
1
A
y
—[0.3—0.5ma
=
"|
®
OALTECO
PIFI
>
Type 1. 2, 2’. 3. 3°
Type 4
2006 -0214-22
2006-0218-11
5. Curtain shaft receiver-B / №98 В
Туре 1. 2. 2°, 3, 3' Туре 4
2006-2126-01 2006-2726-01
2. ¿mm 2.5mm
wid
BET te
a all ==. т JJ ee ee
TRA AA AAA AAA,
2006-0214, 0218
2006-2126, 2726
Shutter cover set
IA Ze
Curtoin shaft receiver-B ВоВ
227
6. 1st curtain stop lever/ 1 ЖЕН“
Type 1, 2, 2’, 3, 3 Type 4
2006-0212-12 2006-0215-11
7. 2nd curtain stop lever / 2 ЖЕН“
Type 1 Туре 2, 2°, 3, 3 Type 4
2006-0219-11 2006-0219-12 2006-0229-11
2006-2123-01 2006-2123-03 2006-2723-02
8. Shutter gear / Y + y 4—*FV—
Туре 1. 2. 2’ Туре 3. 3 Туре 4
2006-2106-02 2006-2106-04
- =
K |
Туре 3 is used.
Type 3 {EI
2006-2107-01 2006-2107-04 2006-2707-01
Е (2)
2006-0212, 0215 lst. curtain stop lever set 1-Е
2006-0219, 0229 2nd. curtain stop lever set 2 &ffikl + ++
2006-2106 Ist. curtoin shutter geor IR. + 9-¥4-
2006-2107, 2707 2nd. curtain shutter gear 282+ ,9-#r-
2006-2123, 2723 2nd. curtain stop lever spring 2 Bf: 27's 7
9. Ratchet stop spring/ 7FI y bik OR
© 2198-81 had been used for prevention of light leakage before 2148 was modified to Type В.
®2198-811+2148 Type BILERZHZETC, ÉMRENOPHIEMIÉMENTUELZE.
Type A
Type B
2006-2148-01
2006-2148-02
2006-2198-81
Not used.
EHL ZU
10. 2nd curtain roller-B / 2#0 -7-B
Type A Type B
9793-2150-40 (Washer!
Not used.
ввело
— | 2006-2144-02
EE I
— ‚ 4.2
ku 1
11. X earth plate / XP — IM
Type A Type B
2006-2204 -01
Not used,
Mey. 5
9612-1620-01 «Screw 9612-1618-01 (Screw!
For 2201. 0207 fitting. | . (For 0207 fitting. ' ET “+
(2204, O207 ISF 2 mm (W207 Hef FM) E |1.8
I — Y
A A A AA PR AA
- ne AA =
2006-2144 2nd. curtain roller-B 246: +- H
2006-2148 Ratchet stop spring 7 * ГУ
2006-2198 Light shield plate Kain LR
2006-2204 X earth plate X“ ‘fk
225 mM
Ш Magnet (for Type 4 shutter) / 74% Y КС (Type 4 © + y 3—H)
o Parts related to magnet for Type 4 shutter are available in two types as shown below, but Type А is not
supplied. For replacement required, use Type B parts as the specified set.
@Type 424 79-ШО-7 7% MANI FRY 2 MM UE TA, Type AK IA, ZAIDA
Type BO MAIL y R CRMLT Fat,
Type A Type B
2006 -2749-02
2006-2762-02
SO)
| | 2.5 ва
——— à
2017-2168-01 *
=} o
4,1mm 4.25 т
Fi лы +,
Eee a
u a St WS A WWW AAA A A A A A AA AAA рр рты
2017-2168 Trigger base plate screw FH Trial
2006-2749 Shutter magnet core + :?7- Ya 1-Я
2006-2762 Magnet collar ЕК ?-
2006- 2791 Shutter magnet bobbin - + +Y-""“74 ЖЕ,
HW Description of Type 2’ / Туре 2 yx Y3—EWT
e Type 2’ shutters are manufactured in small quantities for the production period between Type 2 and Type 3, and
the parts of control base plate mentioned below are different from those of Type 2.
e No Type 2’ parts will be supplied. For replacement required, use Type 2 parts as the specified set.
e Type 2 "+ 1 9—¿liType 2 ¿Type ЗРЯ SNL 7 1 TC, МИБЫНО FRO Baar Type 2 2 RZ
ЕТ.
o Type 2°OMBIKL ELA, LMALESBSIIF ROT ype ОЗС 7 b CRIME TKS
Type 2° Type 2
2006-0202-12
2158(Type 2°)
2006-2158-01
127 A
Disassembly, Assembly and Adjustment
M For disassembly, refer to the related pages in the reverse order as the contents
of this manual are arranged in the order of procedures for assembling and
adjusting.
— Abbreviations —
+ : Assembly noto and reference.
[0] : Oil to be used and where to apply it.
[8] : Bond to be used and where to bind.
: Special tool No. and where to use it.
Ш Assembling/Adjustment Procedures Chart
P. 1
Charge gears A-B,
curtam shutter gear
| P.1
| Shift the 1 st curtain stop lever |
+ P.1
| Curtain spring barrel |
Y
Pana curtain spring barrel shaft checking «Pp, 2 ]
| P.3
| Curtain shaft section |
[ Adjustment of 1 st curtain posıtion---P, 4 ]
Р. 3
| Curtain ribbon guide plate ]
P.3
| 2 nd curtain shutter gear |
!
Adjustment of 2 nd curtain stop position------ Р. 4 |
1 st and 2 nd curtain stop position checking:--P, 4
| P.5
| Control cam |
] P5 P. 6
Control base plate set Control base
Adjustment collar plate assembly
| Curtain shaft adjustment---P. 6 |
|
P.5
| Trigger base plate |
P.5
| Shutter cover plate |
| P. 7
LED mounting and
lead wire soldering
+
Adjustment of magnet over-charge volume--P. 8 |
Adjustment of curtain speeds ee Р.В
Adjustment of Manual sec. time + | pP, 9
Adjustment of curtain bound ee PP, 9
К Adjustment of sync. time lag ++ - P,10 |
| Shutter finished |
226
[1] Charge gears A-B, First curtain shutter gear, and curtain spring barrel
9720-0120-00
+ Shift the 1 st
curtain stop lever 2114
in the direction of Brig 1 |: :
arrow and fit in
the charge gear
shaft thus FUN
positioning it EA
under the 1 st | Ist curtain
Charge gear ‘©
Charge gear А
lst curtain
shutter gear É
gear. 3
+ Do not allow the
Ist curtain stop
lever to go on the
step of Ist
curtain shutter
gear.
BH Assembly procedure (P. 2)
Z
19
_ esta
Screw-lock G
Lo
2189
B Fig 3
0207
+ Insert projection into
Set up the 1 st/2 nd curtain spring
barrels.
l. Insert the 2nd curtain roller A
(2143) В (2144) into the 151
curtain spring barrel. And mount
the 1st/2nd curtain spring barrel
shaft onto the shutter base plate
in the order of numbers.
When mounting No. (4), Slightly widen
the shutter base plate in the direc-
tion of arrow.
2. Turn the curtain spring stop plate
on the 2nd curtain spring barre!
shaft in the direction of arrow,
thus fit it in the lst curtain spring
(P. 2)
After mounting, check for vertical
barrel shaft groove.
looseness of 2nd curtain spring
barre! shaft. (P. 2)
3. Attach the ratchet stop spring (2148),
9793-1635-40 (x2) and ratchet (2147)
in accordance with the procedure on
Page.2. Then charge the curtain
spring to such an extent that the 1st
and 2nd curtain ribbon do not slacken.
ER 9720-0150-00 i.
0219
ase aya series G
TD 9613-1416-01 (x 2)
» Check operation
AE after mounting.
|
N Zu
ин: г | _
* |
shutter base plate hole |
9612-1620-01 GP I, Scotch tape \ | |
+ Arrow-mark section
should be placed i
within the picture
frame
Shutter curtain set
u
|
1 st curtain spring barrel
WFig.1 2114 Spring setting ШЕЮ. 2 2123 Spring setting WFig. 3 2189 Spring setting
Ш Charge gear A and First curtain shutter gear assembly procedure
1. Align the mark of charge gear A (2105) to that of charge gear B (2104) as illustrated
below.
* NOTE: After assembling charge gears, do not turn the gears. If the marks are not aligned
to each other, under-or over-charge will occur. =:
2. Then mount Ist curtain shutter gear (2106) in such a position that the projection on the
back is in contact with the left side of stopper (2151) of shutter base plate.
Mark line
№ Second curtain spring barrel shaft checking, and Ratchet stop
spring, Ratchet mounting
Ш Checking for vertical looseness of 2 nd curtain spring barrel shaft.
Fit in curtain spring shaft stop plate (2128) of the 2nd curtain spring barrel shaft onto the
Ist curtain spring barrel shaft, and then press down the 2 nd curtain spring barre! in the
direction of arrow to make curtain spring shaft stop plate (2128) tight on the shutter base
plate. At that time, the 2nd curtain shaft should be projected 0—0.2 mm from the shutter
hase plate.
*1f the 2nd curtain shaft projection is not within O-0.2 mm, check the shutter base plate.
MRatchet stop spring and ratchet mounting
Mount ratchet stop spring (2148) as illustrated below. Also attach 9793-1635-40, ratchet
(2147). Then charge the spring to such an extent that the lst and 2nd curtain ribbons do not
slacken.
* The end of ratchet stop spring (2148) should be at the tooth bottom of ratchet (2147).
тот" = =
En
2—2
[2] Curtain shaft section-Second curtain shutter gear
2 nd curtain stop lever
MW Refer to Adjustment of 2nd TEN
curtain fall position (P. 4)
2nd curtain ©
shutter gear “OD
| >
a
Curtain ribbon guide plate
++ Mount after adjustment of 1st 4%
curtain fall position
Left-handed screw
® Screw-lock G
[©] 051 #012
©
Shutter curtain
set
10
2 nd curtain barre) —te
¿nd curtain gear
Ist curtain gear
[0] ©! #012 ©
©
++ Temporary adjustment of curtain shaft looseness
Adjust screw After mounting 2131, loosen the curtain shaft adjust
screw by 1/2 turn from the position where the adjust
screw lightly touches the curtain shaft.
Set up the curtain shaft side according to the
ta Pd
de
сл
following procedure.
1.
Mount the curtain shafts onto the shutter
base plate.
. Adjustment of lst curtain fall position (P. 3)
. Apply curtain ribbon guide plate (2131) to
shutter base plate in such a way as to catch.
The ribbon part of lst curtain gear (2135).
Then mount curtain shaft receiver B (2126)
and make the temporary adjustment of curtain
shaft looseness.
. Mount 2nd curtain shutter gear (2107) and
adjust the 2nd curtain fall position, (P. 4)
. Shift 2nd curtain stop lever (0219) and
charge gear A (2105) respectively in the
direction of arrow, then stop the lst and 2nd
curtains at the positions of complete winding.
Finally, check the 1st and 2nd curtain stop
positions. (P. 4)
Ш Adjustment of shutter curtain position
Adjustment of shutter curtain position
1. Shift 2nd curtain stop lever (0219) in the direction of arrow and turn 2nd curtain barre]
(2129) to wind the 2nd curtain and then Stop it at the center of picture frame.
2. Turn Ist curtain gear (2135) in the direction of arrow and maintain the lst curtain slit at
the position as illustrated. Then turn 1 st curtain shutter gear (2106) in the direction of
arrow to let it contact the stopper of shutter base plate. Thus, engage 1 st curtain gear
(2135) with lst curtain shutter gear (2106) and fit in curtain shaft receiver B (2126).
* CHECK:
0219
2129
2106
Turn charge gear А (2105) in the direction of arrow to operate the 1st curtain.
Then the 1st curtain slit position should be as illustrated below.
>
PAE
pa
7
7
7
SOA et a 4 AA E oo
РИГИ И,
Adjustment 2 nd curtain stop position
1. With the 2nd curtain stopped, turn 2nd curtain barrel (2129) in the direction of arrow and
hold it when 2nd curtain stop lever (0219) is in contact with 2nd curtain barrel (2129) as
illustrated below.
2. Fit in 2nd curtain shutter gear (2107) as illustrated, thus engaging it with the gear of 2nd
curtain barrel (2129), set 2nd curtain stop lever (0219) free to turn 2nd curtain shutter
gear (2107) in the direction of arrow until И. stops оп 1st curtain shutter gear (2106).
* CHECK: When 2nd curtain shutter gear (2107) is stopping on the 1st curtain shutter gear,
2107
TOI
17777
curtain overlap should be within 2.540. 5 тт the lst curtain slit position.
- 2106
LIT
om LZ,
Mist and 2nd curtain stop position checking
2.5+0.5mm
2 nd. Curtain
——————— ee ll
l. With winding completed, the Ist curtain stop position should be within 1.5+0.5mm from the
2nd curtain slit position.
2. Shift 151 curtain stop lever (0212) to run the lst curtain only. Then the 2nd curtain stop
position should be within the range as illustrated.
=
1546
7
ZZ
- Standard
1.0mm 0.5mm
(Protrusion of | st curtam slit from picture frame should be less than 0.5mm.)
AA ы
| ee
1 st. Curtain
132 y
[3] Control base plate set-Trigger base plate
MAfter completing the procedure on this page, carry out LED mounting and lead wire soldering
on Page.7, and performance adjustment.
® Screw-lock G
: ting collar
+ Trigger contact (2166) Fig 6 У чув,
«+ Mount it with control cam charged. y + Mounting procedure (Р.6) © 9611-1665-01 9615-1618-01 $
+ Be careful of stains on trigger = Screw-lock G es
contact piece and trigger contact. e
(Clean with FLONSOLVE or alcohol.)
~ Controt base plate set
M Assembly and mounting procedure
©
AU Trigger contact
operating lever
| Control cam stop lever
Trigger contact LE 2118 & ‘
Trigger contact piece”. | | a #012
: 3 D
SÍ
a Fes
plate
9612-1618-01 (x 2) Control cam _ |
= ES
2183 t 2118 on dashed-line
|9 ares part located in the
direction of arrow. Thus
let it go onto the 1 st we
curtain stop lever. _-
@ 9720-0120-00
0258
„= Shutter gear shaft
7 Charge gear shaft
va
e
|
2
Lor rs
wie + Mount 0258 and 2183 as -
¿A shown in Fig 4.
e 2184
ch Æ With winding completed, fit it in
Shutter base plate taking care not
to damage the ribbon with brake
spring
Shutter cover plate
Fig. 6 2166 assembly
М Control base plate assembly
Control base plate
MB Set it on 2291 and mount it by
+ 9720-0150-00
shifting in the direction of arrow.
Do not allow stains on magnet N.
ee 2173 | |
(Clean with 2149 « Check operation after mounting,
FLONSOLVE or
alcohol.) e |
N,
> MFig.8 2157, 2158 SP setting
wa
y Over- charge =
9612-1645-O1 © shal a À „|
[B] screw-lock ‘ory ass all Q 297 Brig 8
: OF 7
ыы 5 Brie 8 SS >> 2nd curtain stop lever 2157 —
9720-0120-00 a | « Check operation
SE after mounting
® 57) 2150
+ Do not allow stains
9720-0120-00 (Y on magnet surface.
(Clean with FLONSOLVE
or alcohol.)
Ш Control base set and adjusting collar mounting procedure
E Control base plate set mounting
Shift control cam stop lever (2115) in the direction of arrow and set control cam operation
spring (2118) onto the control base plate. Then couple the projection of control cam (2109)
with trigger contact operation lever (2173), bring 2nd curtain release operation lever (2160)
to the left side of 2nd curtain stop lever (0219) and thus engage it with shutter gear shaft
(2110) and charge gear shaft (2111).
W Adjusting collar mounting
Fit in collar setting jig (2006-2215-75) onto the shutter base plate, and mount the adjusting
collar.
xD À
2173 Г
2115
* After mounting, re-adjust the vertical looseness of curtain shaft to 0. 1—0.2 тт by the adjust
screw, and then apply screw-lock.
234
HM LED mounting and lead wire soldering
Solder the lead wires
as illustrated below.
+ Solder brown lead
}
E
5
€
8
Brown
wire after inserting
it into circuit
board.
Black
Ш Shutter performance adjustment
M Adjustment items
ba
. Over-charge volume of magnet
. Curtain speeds
. Manual sec. time
. Curtain bound
l
2
3
4
5.
if
]
Synchro time lag
Temporary body (2006-0101-75) and shutter setting procedure
. Shift winding shaft receiver of temporary body in the direction of arrow beforehand.
Position the eccentric screw (9281) of shutter charge gear D (0350) as illustrated below.
‚ Mount the shutter on the front frame of body and set up the front frame by shifting it
towards the body winding side.
‚ Shift winding shaft receiver (0310) in the direction of arrow so that charge gear A (2105)
is engaged with shutter charge gear С (3016) as illustrated below. Then tighten up the set-
Screw,
‚ Make the adjustment by eccentric screw (9281) so that sprocket idle gear (3034) completes
winding with 1 tooth over-charged from control base plate (0202) when winding is done
slowly and 2nd curtain stop lever (0219) is greatly moved in the direction of arrow.
Sel-screw
Precautions for measurement
If high speed operation or speed change occurs when the shutter connected to the measuring
instrument is released, release the shutter with the MEAS-CAL switch set to either “CAL”
or "MEAS". vy?
[1] Adjustment of magnet over-charge volume
Ш Measuring instrument: Camera standard tester (ST-5101)
Ш Standard value: Over-charge volume 0. 1—0. 2 mm
1. Remove trigger base plate (0264) and charge the shutter to make shutter magnet (2150) tight
on shutter magnet core (2149), hold it with finger, and release the shutter. Thus, make the
adjustment with adjust pin (2154) so that the end of 2nd curtain release lever (0255) moves
0. 1~0. 2 mm.
2. Mount trigger base plate (0264) and connect the measuring instrument and shutter as
illustrated below, Then make the setting of the tester as follows.
3. Release the shutter and check for high speed operation. If so, turn adjust pin (2154) to
reduce the over-charge volume under the condition in 1. |
BST-5101
V-SEL: 1.5V
SS-SEL: 1 sec.
SS-X: SS
0.1—0.2 mm TRIG TYPE ON-OFF, OFF-ON: ON-OFF
MEAS-CAL: MEAS
Measuring mode SW: SS-CHECK
ST-5101
0255
[2] Adjustment of curtain speeds
MMeasuring instruments: Camera standard tester (ST-5101)
Shutter tester (FS1D-MN4-S-2101)
Ш Standard valve: 10.7—11.3 ms both 1st and 2 nd curtains.
ds
Connect the measuring instrument and shutter as illustrated below. Make the setting of the
tester as follows.
‚ Set shutter tester to RUN-T, then release the shutter. and make the adjustment by ratchet
(2147) so that both 151 and 2nd curtain speeds are 10.7~11.3 ms.
* If curtain speeds cannot be adjusted because of high speed operation, open the shutter by
turning trigger adjust plate (2213) in the direction of arrow.
. Set the shutter tester to ЕХР-Т, then release the shutter. Make the re-adjustment so that
the values of ranges A and C become equal to each other.
| 2147
White
=
eS
ap}
| ST-5101
AA Pre
tam A MShutter tester
= | р FUNCTION: RUN-T
MsT-5101
V-SEL: 2.8V TRIG TYPE
2213 | | SS-SEL: 1/1000 ON-OFF,OFF-ON: ON-OFF
( o 85 SS-X: SS MEAS-CAL: MEAS
ur — Measuring mode SW: SS-CHECK
[3] Adjustment of Manual sec. time
Wi Measuring instruments: Standard valve:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101) Shutter speeds | Standard Allowable values
: Shutter tester (FS1D-MN4:S-2101) 1/1000 0.98ms | 0.72~1.34ms | +0.45 EV
1. Connect the measuring instrument and 1/500 1.95ms | 1.64~2.32 ms
shutter as illustrated below. Make the 1/60 15.6ms | 13.1~18.5ms
setting of the tester as follows. 1/8 125ms | 105~ 148 ms ae EY
2. Set V-SEL switch of camera standard 1/1 1000ms | 841~1190 ms
tester to 2.8V, SS-SEL switch to 1/
1000, then release the shutter. Make the adjustment by trigger adjust plate shaft (2213) so
that the indication of shutter tester is nearly 0. 98 ms.
3. Set SS-SEL switch to 1/500, then release the shutter. Again make the adjustment by trigger
adjust plate shaft (2213), keeping the balance with the result in 1/1000.
4. Set SS-SEL switch to 1/60, 1/8, and 1, then release the shutter respectively. The measured
values should be within the specifications.
5. Set V-SEL switch to 1.85 V and SS-SEL switch to 1/1000, then release the shutter.
The difference from the value obtained at 2.8 V should be within 0. 4 ms.
White
«a _ ep
Long Red
( \ ST-5101
Short
2213
Black
к) A MShutter tester MsT-5101
FUNCTION: EXP-T V-SEL: 2.8V, 1.85V
SS-SEL: 1/1000, 1/500, 1/60, 1/8
== SS-X: SS
( 5 TRIG TYPE
a ON-OFF, OFF-ON: ON—OFF
MEAS-CAL: MEAS
Measuring mode SW.: SS-CHECK
telson ow
4] Adjustment of curtain bound
WM Measuring instrument: Camera standard tester (ST-5101)
Shutter tester (FS1D-MN4:S-2101)
Ш Standard value: No bound in picture
1. Connect the measuring instrument and shutter as illustrated right. Make the setting of the
tester as follows.
2. Release the shutter and check for curtain bound. If bound exists, adjust it by bending the
brake spring of shutter cover (0203). Note that excessive bending will affect winding
operation.
ST-5101
Black Black
: A MShutter tester
‘ = FUNCTION: BOUND-T
E MsT-5101
V-SEL: 2.8V TRIG TYPE
(Arrow.marked part should i SS-SEL: 1/125 ON-OFF, OFF-ON: ON-OFF
be parallel with cover plate.) | O Re SS-X: ES MEAS-CAL: MEAS
Ww Measuring mode SW.: SS-CHECK
[5] Adjustment of synchro time lag
Wi Measuring instruments WStandard valve:
: Camera standard tester (ST-5101) | Synchro contact
Allowable time lag |
: Shutter tester (FS1D-MN4+-S-2101) y
Range A | 0.45—0.7 ms |
Range B 2.5ms or less |
1. Connect the measuring instrument and shutter as illusrated below. Make the setting of the
tester as follows.
2. Release the shutter and make the adjustment by X lever stopper (2205) so that the measured
value for range A is as specified. At that time, the measured value for range B should be
within the specification.
Black
| O Ae
Li
M Shutter tester
FUNCTION: X
à Black
MST-5101
V-SEL: 2.8V
SS-SEL: 1/60
55-Х: SS
TRIG TYPE
ON-OFF, OFF-ON: ON-OFF
MEAS-CAL: MEAS
Measuring mode SW.: SS-CHECK
235
">